i -Mi EV
i-MiEV - ENGLISH - OHAE12E5
i-MiEV - ENGLISH - OHAE12E5
OWNER’S MANUAL
Foreword
E09200103705
Thank you for selecting a i-MiEV as your new vehicle.
This owner’s manual will add to your understanding and full enjoyment of
the many fine features of this vehicle.
It contains information prepared to acquaint you with the proper way to operate and maintain your vehicle for the utmost in driving pleasure.
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Europe B.V. reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications and/or to make additions to or improvements in
this product without obligation to install them on products previously manufactured.
It is an absolute requirement for the driver to strictly observe all laws and regulations concerning vehicles.
This owner’s manual has been written in compliance with such laws and regulations, but some of the contents may become contradictory with later amendment of the laws and regulations.
Please leave this owner’s manual in this vehicle at time of resale. The next
owner will appreciate having access to the information contained in this owner’s manual.
Repairs to your vehicle:
Vehicles in the warranty period:
All warranty repairs must be carried out by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
Throughout this owner’s manual the words WARNING and CAUTION appear.
These serve as reminders to be especially careful. Failure to follow instructions could result in personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
Information for station service
E09300102480
Tyre inflation pressure
Refer to the “Vehicle care and Maintenance” section for the tyre inflation pressure.
WARNING
indicates a strong possibility of severe personal injury or death if instructions are not followed.
CAUTION
means hazards or unsafe practices that could cause minor personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
You will see another important symbol:
NOTE: gives helpful information.
*: indicates optional equipment.
It may differ according to the sales classification; refer
to the sales catalogue.
Abbreviations used in this owner’s manual:
LHD: Left-Hand Drive
RHD: Right-Hand Drive
Vehicles outside the warranty period:
Where the vehicle is repaired is at the discretion of the owner.
OHAE12E5
BLC11.000897
© 2011 Mitsubishi Motors Corporation
12
Table of contents
Overview
General information
OHAE12E5
Charging
1
Locking and unlocking
2
Seat and seat belts
3
Instruments and controls
4
Starting and driving
5
For pleasant driving
6
For emergencies
7
Vehicle care and Maintenance
8
Specifications
9
Overview
Instruments and Controls (Driver’s area)
E00100106409
1. Instruments p. 4-02
2. Windscreen wiper and washer switch p. 4-16
Rear window wiper and washer switch p. 4-17
3. Electric motor switch p. 5-07
4. Supplemental restraint system - airbag (for driver's seat) p. 3-20
Horn switch p. 4-19
5. Combination headlamps and dipper switch p. 4-11
Turn-signal lever p. 4-14
Front fog lamp switch* p. 4-15
Rear fog lamp switch p. 4-16
6. Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System (AVAS) OFF switch p. 5-13
7. Regular charging lid opener p. 1-07
8. Fuses p. 8-20
9. Headlamp levelling switch p. 4-13
10. Active Stability Control (ASC) OFF switch p. 5-17
11. Electric remote-controlled outside rear-view mirrors
switch p. 5-05
LHD
OHAE12E5
Overview
1. Combination headlamps and dipper switch p. 4-11
Turn-signal lever p. 4-14
Front fog lamp switch* p. 4-15
Rear fog lamp switch p. 4-16
2. Windscreen wiper and washer switch p. 4-16
Rear window wiper and washer switch p. 4-17
3. Instruments p. 4-02
4. Headlamp levelling switch p. 4-13
5. Active Stability Control (ASC) OFF switch p. 5-19
6. Rear window demister switch p. 4-18
7. Electric remote-controlled outside rear-view mirrors
switch p. 5-05
8. Fuses p. 8-20
9. Regular charging lid opener p. 1-07
10. Electric motor switch p. 5-07
11. Supplemental restraint system - airbag (for driver's seat) p. 3-20
Horn switch p. 4-19
RHD
OHAE12E5
Overview
Instruments and Controls (Instrument panel)
E00100106412
1. Centre ventilators p. 6-02
2. Digital clock* p. 6-31
Audio* p. 6-10
3. Hazard warning flasher switch p. 4-15
4. Supplemental restraint system - airbag (for front passenger) p. 3-20
5. Side ventilators p. 6-02
6. Cup holder p. 6-40
7. Glove box p. 6-39
8. Bonnet release lever p. 8-07
9. Front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch p. 3-23
10. Card holder p. 6-39
11. Rear window demister switch p. 4-18
12. Accessory socket p. 6-36
13. Parking brake lever p. 5-03
14. Cup holder p. 6-40
15. Selector lever p. 5-09
16. Heated seat switch p. 3-04
17. Quick charging lid opener p. 1-11
18. USB input terminal* p. 6-33
19. Air conditioning p. 6-04
20. Heated seat switch p. 3-04
LHD
OHAE12E5
Overview
1. Secret box p. 6-39
2. Supplemental restraint system - airbag (for front passenger) p. 3-20
3. Digital clock* p. 6-31
Audio* p. 6-10
4. Hazard warning flasher switch p. 4-15
5. Air conditioning p. 6-04
6. Centre ventilators p. 6-02
7. Heated seat switch p. 3-04
8. Bonnet release lever p. 8-07
9. Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System (AVAS) OFF switch p. 5-13
10. Quick charging lid opener p. 1-11
11. Front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch p. 3-23
12. Heated seat switch p. 3-04
13. Selector lever p. 5-09
14. Parking brake lever p. 5-03
15. Cup holder p. 6-40
16. Accessory socket p. 6-36
17. USB input terminal* p. 6-33
18. Card holder p. 6-39
19. Glove box p. 6-39
20. Cup holder p. 6-40
21. Side ventilators p. 6-02
RHD
OHAE12E5
Overview
Interior
E00100204536
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
LHD
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
OHAE12E5
Head restraints p. 3-07
Supplemental restraint system - curtain airbag p. 3-27
Assist grip p. 6-41
Room lamp (rear) p. 6-38, 8-24
Seat belts p. 3-08
Sun visor p. 6-35
Vanity mirror p. 6-35
Card holder p. 6-36
Map & room lamps (front) p. 6-37, 8-24
Inside rear-view mirror p. 5-05
Electric window lock switch p. 2-10
Electric window control switch p. 2-09
Front seat p. 3-03
Supplemental restraint system - side airbag (for front
seats) p. 3-27
Rear seat* p. 3-05
Tyre repair kit p. 7-04
Tether anchorages for child restraint system p. 3-18
Overview
1. Inside rear-view mirror p. 5-05
2. Map & room lamps (front) p. 6-37, 8-24
3. Sun visor p. 6-35
Vanity mirror p. 6-35
Card holder p. 6-36
4. Seat belts p. 3-08
5. Room lamp (rear) p. 6-38, 8-24
6. Assist grip p. 6-41
7. Supplemental restraint system - curtain airbag p. 3-27
8. Head restraints p. 3-07
9. Tether anchorages for child restraint system p. 3-18
10. Tyre repair kit p. 7-04
11. Rear seat* p. 3-05
12. Supplemental restraint system - side airbag (for front
seats) p. 3-27
13. Front seat p. 3-03
14. Electric window control switch p. 2-09
15. Electric window lock switch p. 2-10
RHD
OHAE12E5
Overview
Electric motor unit room
E00100800013
1. On board charger/DC-DC converter p. 8-06
2. Inverter p. 8-06
3. Brake electric vacuum pump
OHAE12E5
Overview
Outside (Front)
E00100504887
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Bonnet p. 8-07
Windscreen wipers p. 4-16
Antenna p. 6-30
Outside rear-view mirror p. 5-05
Electric window control p. 2-09
Quick charging lid p. 1-11
Traction battery p. 8-06
Side turn-signal lamps/Hazard warning lamps p. 4-09, 8-24, 8-30
Headlamps p. 4-11, 8-24, 8-24, 8-28, 8-29
Position lamps p. 4-11, 8-24, 8-24, 8-30
Front turn-signal lamps/Hazard warning lamps p. 4-09, 8-24, 8-24,
8-30
10. Front fog lamps* p. 4-15, 8-24, 8-31
Daytime running lamps* p. 4-13, 8-24, 8-31
OHAE12E5
Overview
Outside (Rear)
E00100504702
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
OHAE12E5
Tailgate p. 2-08
Rear window wiper p. 4-17
Rear spoiler
High-mounted stop lamp p. 8-24, 8-34
Reversing lamps p. 8-24, 8-33
Stop lamps/Tail lamps p. 4-14, 8-24, 8-33
Turn-signal lamps/Hazard warning lamps p. 4-14, 4-15, 8-24, 8-33
Keyless entry system p. 2-03
Locking and unlocking the doors p. 2-05
Regular charging lid p. 1-07
Tyre inflation pressures p. 8-15
Tyre rotation p. 8-16
Tyre chains p. 8-17
Size of tyres and wheels p. 9-05
Rear fog lamp p. 4-16, 8-24, 8-32
Licence plate lamps p. 4-11, 8-24, 8-34
General information
Familiarizing yourself with i-MiEV................................................02
Installation of accessories................................................................03
Modification/alterations to the electrical systems............................04
Genuine parts...................................................................................04
Disposal information for used batteries...........................................05
Cautions and actions to deal with intense heat................................06
Cautions and actions to deal with intense cold................................08
OHAE12E5
General information
Familiarizing yourself with
i-MiEV
E00202600016
This section describes features that the i-MiEV has
as an electric vehicle and gives precautions that
you should observe. It is important. Please read it
carefully.
Main features
WARNING
l
Always pay special attention to pedestrians.
Even if the Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System (AVAS) sounds, pedestrians may not
notice your vehicle. Refer to “Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System (AVAS)” on page
5-12.
Traction battery
E00202800034
WARNING
l A sealed lithium ion high voltage battery
is adopted for i-MiEV. If the lithium ion
battery is improperly disposed of, there is
a risk of severe burns and electrical
shock that may result in serious injury or
death and there is also a risk of environmental damage.
E00202700033
l Energy required for driving is only electricil
l
l
l
l
l
02
ty and fuel supply is not required.
The traction battery and electric motor unit
are mounted outside the passenger compartment. In this way, passenger space is obtained for riding of four adults.
With the high performance motor, noise and
vibration during driving are greatly limited
and powerful acceleration can also be obtained.
With regenerative braking, the traction battery is automatically charged when the accelerator is released.
The vehicle can be charged from general power outlets (rated AC 220-240 V).
Charge with the quick charger for i-MiEV is
also available.
The creeping behaviour occurs in i-MiEV
like a vehicle with automatic transmission.
Regenerative braking
It is equivalent to engine braking of an engine vehicle. If you step off the accelerator pedal during driving, motion energy is converted into electric energy
using the motor as a power generator.
In this conversion, braking force is generated and
converted electric energy is charged in the traction
battery.
Regenerative braking is stronger in the order of the
selector lever position of “C” (COMFORT), “D”
(DRIVE), “B” (BRAKE).
Put the selector lever to the “B” (BRAKE) or “C”
(COMFORT) position according to the driving condition.
“B”: Strong regenerative braking (For downhill)
“C”: Weak regenerative braking (For long cruising)
l It is the battery to operate the motor (electric
l
l
motor unit) and the air conditioning.
In addition to the traction battery, i-MiEV
has the auxiliary battery to operate lamps, wipers, etc.
Compact, light-weight lithium ion battery
with high energy density is used for the traction battery.
The lithium ion battery has the following characteristics. Please read this carefully and
treat the battery paying attention to the following:
Characteristics
l It is not necessary to consume the battery completely before charging.
l The capacity is gradually degraded depending on time used and operating conditions.
This will result in a decrease from the vehicle’s initial cruising range.
l The performance may be changed due to the
outside temperature. At low temperature, in
particular, the cruising range is short and the
charging time is long, compared to operation
at normal temperature.
OHAE12E5
General information
l If
l
you store your vehicle at an extremely
high or low temperature, the battery capacity
may be lowered.
The battery is gradually discharged without
use and the battery charge is lowered.
Precautions for operation
l Do not store your vehicle with the energy level gauge showing 0 bars.
Doing so could damage the traction battery.
The battery may have to be replaced depending on the low capacity.
l If you do not use your vehicle for a long
time, please charge the traction battery to the
full every 3 months so that the energy level
gauge may not be 0 bars.
l MITSUBISHI MOTORS collects traction batteries. If you scrap your vehicle, please consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
Service Point.
l Since
l
the air conditioning (cooling or heating) consumes power of the traction battery,
its operation results in a shorter cruising
range. Maintain an appropriate temperature.
Put the selector lever to the “B” (BRAKE) or
“C” (COMFORT) position according to the
road condition. To charge the traction battery
with appropriate use of regenerative braking
can increase the cruising range.
NOTE
l The progress of the battery capacity loss de-
Installation of accessories
E00200301003
We recommend you to consult a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
l The installation of accessories, optional
parts, etc., should only be carried out within
the limits prescribed by law in your country,
and in accordance with the guidelines and
warnings contained within the documents accompanying this vehicle.
l Installing electric components incorrectly
could lead to a fire. See the “Modification/alterations to the electrical systems” section
within this owner’s manual.
l Using a cellular phone or radio set inside the
vehicle without an external antenna may
cause electrical system interference, which
could lead to unsafe vehicle operation.
l Tyres and wheels which do not meet specifications must not be used.
Refer to the “Specifications” section for information regarding wheel and tyre sizes.
Important points!
pends on the vehicle usage and the environment.
We recommend to do regular charging from
2 bars or less to charge completely at least
once in 3 months.
The procedure lets the battery remaining indicator adjusted automatically.
Due to large number of accessory and replacement
parts of different manufactures available in the market, it is not possible, not only for MITSUBISHI
MOTORS, but also for a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Authorized Service Point, to check whether the attachment or installation of such parts affects the
overall safety of your MITSUBISHI-vehicle.
Cruising range
E00202900019
l Even if the charge level is the same, the cruising range may vary depending on the driving
conditions. Since driving at high speed or
climbing on a hill requires higher consumption of the traction battery than usual, the
cruising range is shortened.
OHAE12E5
03
General information
Even when such parts are officially authorized, for
example by a “general operators permit” (an appraisal for the part) or through the execution of the
part in an officially approved manner of construction, or when a single operation permit following
the attachment or installation of such parts, it cannot be deduced from that alone, that the driving safety of your vehicle has not been affected.
Consider also that there basically exists no liability
on the part of the appraiser or the official. Maximum safety can only be ensured with parts recommended, sold and fitted or installed by a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS authorized Service Point
(MITSUBISHI MOTORS genuine replacement
parts and MITSUBISHI MOTORS accessories).
The same also pertains to modifications of
MITSUBISHI vehicles with respect to the production specifications. For safety reasons, do not attempt any modifications other than those that follow the recommendations of a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS authorized Service Point.
04
Modification/alterations to the
electrical systems
E00200400414
MITSUBISHI MOTORS CORPORATION has always manufactured safe, high quality vehicles. In
order to maintain this safety and quality, it is important that any accessory that is to be fitted, or any
modifications carried out which involve the electrical systems, should be carried out in accordance
with MITSUBISHI guidelines.
CAUTION
l
If the wires interfere with the vehicle
body or improper installation methods
are used (protective fuses not included,
etc.), electronic devices may be adversely
affected, resulting in a fire or other accident.
OHAE12E5
Genuine parts
E00200500499
MITSUBISHI MOTORS has gone to great lengths
to bring you a superbly crafted automobile offering
the highest quality and dependability.
Use MITSUBISHI MOTORS Genuine Parts, designed and manufactured to maintain your
MITSUBISHI MOTORS automobile at top performance. MITSUBISHI MOTORS Genuine Parts
are identified by this mark and are available at all
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
Points.
General information
Disposal information for used
batteries
E00201300045
Your vehicle contains batteries
and/or accumulators.
Do not mix with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery
and recycling of used batteries,
please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance
with your national legislation
and the Directives 2006/66/EC.
MITSUBISHI MOTORS collects traction batteries. If you
scrap your vehicle, please consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Authorized Service Point.
By disposing of these batteries
correctly, you will help to save
valuable resources and prevent
any potential negative effects on
human health and the environment which could otherwise
arise from inappropriate waste
handling.
OHAE12E5
05
General information
Cautions and actions to deal with intense heat
E00203000033
l When the vehicle is driven in a high ambient temperature, its air-conditioner performance can be insufficient. Also, using the air conditioner can reduce the
vehicle’s cruising range.
l When the ambient temperature is approximately 40 °C or higher, the phenomena described below may occur. Please take the described corrective action.
Approx. ambient temperature
Corrective action
Phenomena
l During quick charging, repeated high-speed driving, or repeated
Approx. 40 °C or higher
Startup and driving
l
Charging and battery
uphill driving, the power down warning lamp* comes on and
the motor output is restricted to protect the traction battery or motor (electric motor unit).
Regenerative braking performance may decrease.
l During quick charging, charging times get longer.
l During quick charging, repeated high-speed driving, or repeated
Startup and driving
uphill driving, the power down warning lamp* comes on and
the motor output is restricted to protect the traction battery or motor (electric motor unit).
you continue driving after the power down warning lamp*
has come on, the vehicle may stop when you have driven a few
kilometres.
l During quick charging, charging times get longer.
Charging and battery
Startup and driving
Charging and battery
06
the vehicle for a while,
avoid quick charging, and wait
for the power down warning
lamp* to go off.
l If
Approx. 45 °C or higher
Approx. 60 °C or higher
l Stop
l The
traction battery capacity decreases more quickly, and the
cruising range decreases more quickly.
l Park
in a well-ventilated, shady
place.
l The power down warning lamp* comes on, and the vehicle may
l Park
l Regular charging or quick charging may become impossible.
l Park
stop.
OHAE12E5
in a well-ventilated, shady
place, avoid quick charging, and
wait for the power down warning lamp* to go off.
in a well-ventilated, shady
place.
General information
NOTE
l *: Refer to “Power down warning lamp” on page 4-11. Illumination of the power down warning lamp does not indicate a malfunction.
OHAE12E5
07
General information
Cautions and actions to deal with intense cold
E00203100047
l When the vehicle is driven in a low ambient temperature, its heater performance can be insufficient. Also, using the heater can reduce the vehicle’s cruising
range.
l When the ambient temperature is approximately -15 °C or lower, the phenomena described below may occur. Please take the described corrective action.
Approx. ambient
temperature
Phenomena
Startup and driving
Corrective action
l Motor output is restricted, and the power down warning lamp*1
l Keep
l Regenerative braking performance may decrease.
l When
l Charging times get longer.
l Charging may not be completed.
l When
may come on.
Approx. -15 °C or
lower
Charging and battery
08
OHAE12E5
driving if you can drive the
same speed as surrounding vehicles. If you cannot drive the same
speed as surrounding vehicles, stop
the vehicle in a safe place and
charge the traction battery or drive
carefully safely surrounding vehicles.
braking, depress the brake
pedal more strongly
you have finished driving,
charge the traction battery before
its temperature falls.
General information
Approx. ambient
temperature
Phenomena
l Motor output is restricted, and the power down warning lamp*1
l Keep
l Regenerative braking performance may decrease.
l When
l Charging may become impossible.
l When
l The ready indicator*2 does not come on, and startup may not be
l In the daytime, wait for the temper-
may come on.
Startup and driving
Approx. -25 °C or
lower
Charging and battery
Startup and driving
Approx. -30 °C or
lower
Corrective action
l
possible.
In the worst-case scenario, the vehicle may become undrivable
(with the energy level gauge and cruising range indications still
shown).
driving if you can drive the
same speed as surrounding vehicles. If you cannot drive the same
speed as surrounding vehicles, stop
the vehicle in a safe place and
charge the traction battery or drive
carefully safely surrounding vehicles.
braking, depress the brake
pedal more strongly.
you have finished driving,
charge the traction battery before
its temperature falls.
ature to rise. When the temperature
in the vicinity of the traction battery has risen, start up.
l Regenerative braking performance may decrease.
l When
l Charging may become impossible.
l In the daytime, wait for the temper-
Charging and battery
braking, depress the brake
pedal more strongly
ature to rise. When the temperature
in the vicinity of the traction battery has risen, start up.
CAUTION
l If the outside temperature is -25 °C or less, the lithium ion battery may freeze and it cannot be charged or provide power to drive the vehicle. Move
the vehicle to a warm location.
OHAE12E5
09
General information
NOTE
l *1: Refer to “Power down warning lamp” on page 4-11. Illumination of the power down warning lamp does not indicate a malfunction.
l *2: Refer to “Ready indicator” on page 4-09.
10
OHAE12E5
Charging
Battery..........................................................................................1-02
Basic knowledge for charging......................................................1-02
EV charging cable........................................................................1-04
Regular charging (charging method with rated AC
220-240 V outlet).....................................................................1-06
Quick charging (charging method with quick charger)................1-11
MiEV Remote System*................................................................1-13
OHAE12E5
1
Charging
Basic knowledge for charging
Battery
1
E08300100027
E08300200031
There are two types of batteries installed in your vehicle: a traction battery for operating the motor (electric motor unit) and air conditioning as well as an
auxiliary battery for starting the electric motor unit
and operating the lamps, wipers, etc. This chapter
explains charging of the traction battery.
There are two types of charging: regular charging
and quick charging.
Regular charging is performed through the onboard charger using rated AC 220-240 V outlet as
the power source.
The rated AC voltage may differ from country to
country.
Quick charging is performed with the quick charger compatible with i-MiEV.
NOTE
l The auxiliary battery is automatically chargl
ed while the ready indicator is illuminated or
during charge for the traction battery.
Refer to “Ready indicator” on page 4-09.
If the auxiliary battery is flat, the electric motor unit cannot be started. Also, the charging
cannot be started.
Refer to “Emergency starting” on page 7-02.
l
WARNING
l
l
1-02
WARNING
To reduce the risk of electric shock or
fire due to electric leak, always use an outlet protected by a residual current detector, rated for amperage equal to or greater than the value specified by
MITSUBISHI MOTORS, and that is connected to a dedicated branch circuit. If
the circuit is shared, and another electrical device is being used at the same time
the vehicle is charging, the breaker may
trip and the circuit may cause adverse interference on MCB (Moulded Circuit
Board) and household electrical appliances such as TVs and audio systems.
It is possible to charge even in rain or
snow. However, be sure to pay attention
to the following:
• Never connect or disconnect the
charge connector with a wet hand to
prevent an electric shock.
• Never make the connection wet when
charging.
Never charge in bad weather such as
heavy rain, strong wind and with the risk
OHAE12E5
of lightning. Also, do not keep opening
the inner lid and the charging lid or do
not leave the EV charging cable in outdoor areas. Doing so could lead to water
entering the charge connector or the
charge port, resulting in fire or an electric shock.
If the connected part of the charging plug
has been buried in snow while charging,
turn off the hand switch or the breaker
connected with the outlet first, then remove the snow and disconnect the charging plug. If your vehicle body has been
buried in snow while charging, remove
the snow and then disconnect the charge
connector.
CAUTION
l
Do not attempt to perform a jump start
on the auxiliary battery at the same time
that the traction battery is being charged.
Doing so may damage the vehicle or charging cable and could cause injury. Refer to
“Emergency starting” on page 7-02.
NOTE
l Repeatedly
l
performing only quick charging
may reduce the battery capacity. In usual
charge, regular charging is recommended.
To maintain the capacity of the traction battery, the following is recommended:
• Fully charge the vehicle in regular charging every two weeks.
Charging
l
l
l
• Do not repeat charging near the full
charge level.
The quick charging gives priority when the
regular charging and the quick charging are
performed at the same time.
At this time, the regular charging will be stopped.
The progress of the battery capacity loss depends on the vehicle usage and the environment.
We recommend to do regular charging from
2 segments or less to charge completely at
least once in 3 months.
The procedure lets the battery remaining indicator adjusted automatically.
In the event of an electrical power outage
while charging, charging restarts automatically with the restoration of electricity.
1
Guideline for charging time
E08300700036
The regular charging time (from 1 bar of energy level gauge to full charge) is different according to the
current value.
l 230 V/10 A → about 8 hours
l 230 V/8 A → about 10 hours
About 30 minutes with quick charger (About 80 %
of full charge)
NOTE
l The
charging time may vary depending on
the battery condition, operation environment
of the vehicle and specification of the quick
charger.
OHAE12E5
1-03
Charging
EV charging cable
E08301100040
Your vehicle is equipped with the EV charging cable (A) with control box (B).
The indicator illuminates/blinks in the following
conditions.
: Illuminates : Blinking : Not illuminates
Indicator (LED)
1
READY
(Green)
READY
(Green)
CHARGE
(Orange)
FAULT
(Red)
CHARGE
(Orange)
FAULT
(Red)
Status and action to be taken
Every time the charging cable plug (C) is connected to an outlet, all indicator lights illuminate for 0.5 seconds.
After initial processing is completed, when the regular charge connector is not connected to the vehicle, or the
regular charge connector is connected to the vehicle but charging is not being performed.
While the traction battery is being charged
When an electric leakage occurs or the EV charging cable malfunctions
Stop use immediately and contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
When the EV charging cable malfunctions
Stop use immediately and contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
If the control box indicator light does not illuminate after connecting the charging cable plug to the outlet,
check the circuit breaker for the outlet. If the breaker has tripped, the circuit may not be suitable for use with
EV charging cable. You should have a licensed electrician inspect and repair the electrical circuit. If the breaker is not tripped, stop using the EV charging cable and contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
Point.
1-04
OHAE12E5
Charging
WARNING
l
l
l
l
l
l
If the green or orange indicator does not
illuminate or the red indicator blinks or illuminates during regular charging,
please contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Authorized Service Point.
Do not charge with the EV charging cable banded or rolled.
The cable may be heated and resulting in
fire.
Do not alter or disassemble the EV charging cable.
Doing so could cause fire, an electric
shock or injury.
Be sure to install the cap to the regular
charge connector and store the EV charging cable at a place where the cable is not
exposed to water or dust. Entry of foreign
matter such as water or dust at the metal
terminal of the regular charge connector
or charging cable plug may cause a fire
or malfunction. Contact with metal such
as wire or tool may cause fire, an electric
shock or malfunction.
Never force the connection if the EV charging cable or connector shows damage or
is not easily connected due to foreign material entering the connector or the outlet. And never use an outlet that is worn,
damaged, or will not hold the plug firmly.
Doing so could cause fire, an electric
shock, or short circuit.
Pay attention to the following for handling the EV charging cable.
Damage to the cable could cause fire, an
electric shock, or short circuit.
• Do not pull with undue force.
• Do not twist.
WARNING
• Do not drag.
• Do not put an object on top.
• Do not put the cable close to a heating
unit including heater.
• Do not drop the regular charge connector or do not give strong impact to
it.
CAUTION
l Do not charge with the outlet that is smaller than the current value described on
the control box.
NOTE
E08301200025
CAUTION
l While charging, it must be prevented be-
ing damaged to the control box by the attached rope as shown in the following illustration.
NOTE
l Use
l
the hook with load capacity over 4 kg,
that weight is the EV charging cable.
Check the rope has no damage or no loose before use.
Hook
l All
l
Handling and storing the control box
indicators are illuminated momentarily
for confirming operation when the charging
cable plug is inserted into an outlet. After
that the green indicator is continuously illuminated.
The orange indicator will go off when the
charging is completed. The green indicator is
continuously illuminated while the charging
plug is inserted into an outlet.
Rope
Cleaning the EV charging cable
E08301300042
1. Gently wipe off with gauze or other soft
cloth soaked with a 3 % aqueous solution of
neutral detergent.
2. Wipe off all the detergent with a soft cloth
dipped in fresh water and thoroughly wrung
out.
OHAE12E5
1-05
1
Charging
3. Wipe all moisture off and dry in a shaded,
well-ventilated area.
WARNING
Regular charging (charging
method with rated AC 220-240 V
outlet)
1
l
CAUTION
l Never use benzine, petrol, or other organ-
WARNING
l For safety, do not allow children or peo-
l
l
ic solvents, or acid or alkaline solvents. Doing so could cause deformation, discolour, or malfunction. Also, these substances may be present in various cleaners, so
check carefully before use.
l
1-06
l
E08300900038
l In cleaning, be sure to remove the charg-
ing cable plug and the regular charge connector from the outlet. Do not connect or
disconnect the plug and the connector
with wet hands. Doing so could cause an
electric shock.
Do not have the metal terminal of the regular charge connector and the charging
cable plug be exposed to water or neutral
detergent. Operation with water could
cause fire or an electric shock.
WARNING
ple who are not familiar with charging to
charge for themselves. Also, do not use
the charge connector within reach of children.
Persons who use electro-medical apparatus such as implantable cardiac pacemaker or implantable cardioverter defibrillator must check effect from charging with
the manufacturer of electro-medical apparatus.
If you use any medical electric devices,
take into account the following precautions.
• Do not stay inside the vehicle.
• Do not go inside the vehicle, for example to remove or place an item in the
passenger compartment.
• Do not open the rear hatch, for example to remove or place an item in the
cargo area.
Charging may affect the operation of electric medical devices and result in serious
personal injury or death.
Do not charge with the EV charging cable banded or rolled.
Doing so the cable may be heated and this
might result in fire.
OHAE12E5
l
l
l
Before charging, make sure that there is
no foreign matter such as dust at the regular charge port and the regular charge
connector.
At this time, do not touch the regular
charge port.
When the regular charge connector is connected to the charge port, prevent foreign
matter such as water or dust from entering in the port.
Connection with foreign matter such as
water or dust may cause fire or an electric shock. Do not perform charging if
there might be strong exposure to water
at the connection.
Never pull the cable to remove the plug.
And never submerge the EV charging connector, control box or plug in water.
Please observe the following in order to
prevent accidents during charging such
as electrocution.
• Make sure to use the EV charging cable that comes with the vehicle.
• Do not charge another vehicle using
the attached EV charging cable.
Doing so the cable may be heated and
this might result in fire.
• Make sure to use an outlet that is protected from water entering.
• Do not perform charging with the
body cover.
• Do not remove and insert plugs with
wet hands.
• Do not charge the battery if there is a
risk of lightning.
Charging
WARNING
l While it is normal for the connector and
l
l
l
l
l
charging cable to become warm during
charging, discontinue use immediately if
the connector or charging cable becomes
hot to the touch.
While it is normal for the control box to
become warm during charging, discontinue use immediately if the control box becomes hot to the touch.
If abnormal smells are detected or the vehicle produces smoke, quickly stop charging.
Do not perform charging at a poorly ventilated place with surroundings covered.
Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away
from the auxiliary battery.
Flammable gas generated from the auxiliary battery in charging may be filled in a
building, resulting in explosion.
If charging is inevitably required, ventilate the area well.
Grasp the regular charging plug when
connecting or disconnecting the EV charging cable.
Grasping the cable could cause an electric shock, short circuit, and/or fire.
During charging, the cooling fans inside
the bonnet room may automatically be operated even if the electric motor switch is
in the “LOCK” position.
Keep your hands away from the cooling
fan during charging.
CAUTION
l Do not perform charging from other power source like a generator. Doing so could
cause a malfunction.
3. Pull the regular charging opener (A) at the
bottom left/right of the instrument panel to
open the regular charging lid (B) at the right
rear side of the vehicle.
NOTE
1
l If the charge connector is not easily connec-
l
l
l
ted to the charge port due to foreign material
entering, never force the connection. Doing
so could damage the charging equipment or
the vehicle. Contact a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
The on board charger is only for rated AC
220-240 V outlets.
When connecting or disconnecting the regular charging plug, insert/pull out the plug
straight.
Also, do not incline or twist the plug.
Doing so could cause a bad connection or malfunction.
Make sure to lock the doors to prevent theft,
etc. during charging.
4. Press the tab (C) to open the inner lid (D).
Charging from rated AC 220-240 V
outlet
E08301000049
1. Fully apply the parking brake and place the
selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position.
2. Stop the electric devices such as lamps and
turn the electric motor switch to the “LOCK”
position.
OHAE12E5
1-07
Charging
WARNING
l
Do not touch the metal terminal of the regular charge port (E) and the regular
charge connector.
Doing so could cause an electric shock and/
or malfunction.
1
WARNING
l
l
CAUTION
l Do not leave for a long time with the in-
ner lid opened. It becomes impossible to
charge if foreign material enters the regular charge port.
NOTE
l There is a hole on the charge port for water
l
drainage. If this hole is blocked and water
gets trapped in the charge port, do not
charge. Contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Authorized Service Point.
If the charge port is frozen, melt the ice using a hair drier. Forcing the charge connector
to connect while frozen could result in malfunction.
l
Make sure that the plug is inserted all the
way into the outlet before use.
To reduce the risk of electric shock or
fire due to electric leak, always use an outlet protected by a residual current detector, rated for amperage equal to or greater than the value specified by
MITSUBISHI MOTORS, and that is connected to a dedicated branch circuit. If
the circuit is shared, and another electrical device is being used at the same time
the vehicle is charging, the breaker may
trip and the circuit may cause adverse interference on MCB (Moulded Circuit
Board) and household electrical appliances such as TVs and audio systems.
To reduce the risk of electric shock, connect only to a properly earthed and waterproofed outlet.
NOTE
l The shape of the charging cable plug and out-
1-08
Denmark 250 V/10 A
Italy 250 V/10 A
UK, Ireland 250 V/13 A
Germany, Spain, France, Sweden, etc. 250 V/16 A
Israel 250 V/16 A
5. Insert the charging cable plug into an outlet.
l
Switzerland 250 V/10 A
let may differ from country to country as
shown in the illustration.
Use the following outlets.
OHAE12E5
Charging
6. Remove the cap (F) on the regular charge connector (G) and make sure that there is no foreign matter such as dust at the end of the regular charge connector and the regular charge
port.
CAUTION
l Do not clasp the top of regular charge connector. It could cause injury to touch the
protrusion on the lid.
1
If the charging indicator is not illuminated,
charging is not started.
Make sure that the regular charge port, the
plug and the connector are appropriately connected, and perform charging from Step 5
again.
7. Connect the regular charge connector until a
click sound is heard without pressing the button (H).
NOTE
l If
the electric motor switch is turned to the
“START” position with the regular charge
connector connected to the regular charge
port, the electric motor unit cannot be started.
8. Make sure that the charging indicator on the
instrument cluster is illuminated.
OHAE12E5
NOTE
l When the regular charge connector is connecl
ted to the charge port, the charging indicator
is blinking. When charging is started, the
charging indicator is illuminated.
The charge level for traction battery can be
checked with the energy level gauge (I) on
the instrument cluster.
Refer to “Energy level gauge” on page 4-06.
1-09
Charging
NOTE
l Make
sure that the inner lid is completely
closed.
If the regular charging lid is forcibly closed
without completely closing the inner lid, the
hinge on the inner lid may be broken.
11. Remove the charging cable plug from the outlet.
12. Install the cap on the regular charge connector.
1
9. Charging is complete when the charging indicator turns off. Pull out the regular charging
plug while pressing the button (J).
WARNING
l
l
NOTE
l Charging
can be stopped half way. In this
case, also, pull out the regular charge connector while pressing the button.
After charging, be sure to close the inner
lid and the regular charging lid completely.
Be careful that water or dust does not enter in the regular charge port, inner lid
and regular charge connector.
Entry of water or dust could cause electric leakage, resulting in fire or electric
shock.
After charging, be sure to disconnect the
charge connector from the charge port.
If the charge connector is only partially
engaged and the connector latch is unlocked, you could turn the electric motor
switch to the “START” position and the
vehicle could start moving. It could lead
to an unexpected accident.
10. Close the inner lid and close the regular charging lid.
1-10
OHAE12E5
CAUTION
l After charging, be sure to disconnect the
plug from the outlet.
If the plug is left connected to the outlet,
immersion in water or tampering may
cause leakage or an electric shock.
Charging
Quick charging (charging
method with quick charger)
E08301400043
WARNING
l During
charging, the cooling fans inside
the bonnet room may automatically be operated even if the electric motor switch is
in the “LOCK” position.
Keep your hands away from the cooling
fan during charging.
WARNING
l
l
l
l
l
Be sure to use the quick charger compatible with i-MiEV.
Use of a non-compatible quick charger
may cause fire or malfunction.
For the quick charger compatible with
i-MiEV,
consult
a
MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
For operation of quick chargers, follow
the manual of each quick charger.
Persons who use electro-medical apparatus such as implantable cardiac pacemaker or implantable cardioverter defibrillator must check effect from charging with
the manufacturer of electro-medical apparatus. Electro-medical apparatus operations could be affected by charging.
Before charging, make sure that there is
no foreign matter such as dust at the
quick charge port and the quick charge
connector.
At this time, do not touch the quick
charge port.
When the quick charge connector is connected to the quick charge port, prevent
foreign matter such as water or dust
from entering in the port.
Connection with foreign matter such as
water or dust may cause fire or an electric shock. Do not perform charging if
there might be strong exposure to water
at the connection.
3. Pull the quick charging lid opener (A) at the
bottom left/right of the driver’s seat to open
the quick charging lid (B) at the left rear side
of the vehicle.
1
NOTE
l If the charge connector is not easily connec-
l
l
l
l
ted to the charge port due to foreign material
entering, never force the connection. Doing
so could damage the charging equipment or
the vehicle. Contact a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
The quick charger might be installed in the
public parking space, some chargers are not
suitable for this vehicle. Check the manual of
each quick charger when charging.
The charge connector and the EV charging cable stick out of the vehicle body while charging, so be careful that your body does not get
stuck with them or they do not touch the next
vehicle.
The vehicle equipped with a quick charge
port is compatible with most CHAdeMO (Japanese industry standard) connectors on charging stations.
Make sure to lock the doors to prevent theft,
etc. during charging.
4. Press the tab (C) to open the inner lid (D).
1. Fully apply the parking brake and move the
selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position.
2. Stop the electric devices such as lamps, air
conditioning, etc. and turn the electric motor
switch to the “LOCK” position.
OHAE12E5
1-11
Charging
WARNING
6. Make sure that the charging indicator on the
instrument cluster is illuminated.
Refer to “Energy level gauge” on page 4-06.
l Do
not touch the metal terminal of the
quick charge port (E) and the quick
charge connector.
Doing so could cause an electric shock and/
or malfunction.
1
CAUTION
l Be sure to insert the quick charge connec-
l
tor straight into the quick charge port
right up to the base.
Failure to do so may result in the traction
battery not charging or could cause damage to the charging equipment.
Do not leave for a long time with the inner lid opened. It becomes impossible to
charge if a foreign material is entered to
the quick charge port.
If the charging indicator is not illuminated,
charging is not started.
Follow the manual of each quick charger.
l There is a hole on the charge port for water
l
drainage. If this hole is blocked and water
gets trapped in the charge port, do not
charge. Contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Authorized Service Point.
If the charge port is frozen, melt the ice using a hair drier. Forcing the charge connector
to connect while frozen could result in malfunction.
l
NOTE
l When the regular charge connector is connec-
NOTE
l
ted to the charge port, the charging indicator
is blinking. When charging is started, the
charging indicator is illuminated.
The charge level for traction battery can be
checked with the energy level gauge (F) on
the instrument cluster.
hicle body during quick charging.
This noise comes from operation of the
traction battery cooling system, and it is
not a malfunction.
Since the traction battery cooling system
uses cool air of the air conditioning, the
air conditioning is automatically operated.
After quick charging, if the area under
the vehicle is wet, transparent and loose,
it is dehumidified water from the air conditioning and not a malfunction.
7. Charging is complete when the charging indicator turns off.
Disconnect the quick charge connector according to the manual of the quick charger.
5. Connect the quick charge connector in the
quick charge port to begin charging.
For connecting and disconnecting, follow the
instruction manual for each quick charger.
1-12
l Operation noise may be heard from the ve-
OHAE12E5
Charging
CAUTION
l As the quick charge connector is heavier
l
in comparison to the regular charge connector, allowing it to drop could cause
damage to the vehicle or charge connector or personal injury. When removing
the connector, be sure to pull it out
straight and as carefully as possible.
Do not leave the quick charge connector
connected to the quick charge port after
charging.
Doing so, someone might stumble and it
could cause an injury or the quick charge
port might be damaged by playing it.
8. Close the inner lid and close the quick charging lid.
NOTE
l If
l
l
the electric motor switch is turned to the
“START” position with the quick charge connector connected to the quick charge port,
the electric motor unit cannot be started.
Be sure to disconnect the quick charge connector before start.
Charging may be completed before full
charge. This is a control for efficient charge
and not a malfunction.
To achieve full charge, repeat charging from
Step 5 again.
Make sure that the inner lid is completely
closed.
If the quick charging lid is forcibly closed
without completely closing the inner lid, the
hinge on the inner lid may be broken.
MiEV Remote System*
E08301800018
The MiEV Remote System has the following three
functions.
l Timer Charging
When the EV charging cable (regular
charger) is connected, the batteries will
only charge during the pre-set time period selected using the MiEV Remote.
l Remote Climate Control
When the EV charging cable (regular
charger) is connected, the air-conditioner
can be activated for up to 30 minutes prior to using the vehicle. This feature can
be used to cool or heat the car and to activate the front and rear window defroster.
l Traction Battery Level Indicator
The charge remaining in the traction battery can be confirmed through the MiEV
Remote.
WARNING
l After charging, be sure to close the inner
l
lid and the quick charging lid completely.
Be careful that water or dust does not enter in the quick charge port, inner lid and
quick charge connector.
Entry of water or dust could cause fire,
electric shock or short circuit.
After charging, be sure to disconnect the
charge connector from the charge port.
If the charge connector is only partially
engaged and the connector latch is unlocked, you could turn the electric motor
switch to the “START” position and the
vehicle could start moving. It could lead
to an unexpected accident.
MiEV
Remote
Glass antenna
OHAE12E5
1-13
1
Charging
WARNING
l
1
l
l
l
l
1-14
Individuals who use implantable pacemakers or implantable cardiovascular-defibrillators should keep away from the external and internal transmitters. The electromagnetic waves used in the MiEV Remote System may affect the operation of
implantable pacemakers and implantable
cardiovascular defibrillators.
Individuals using other electro-medical
apparatus besides implantable pacemakers and implantable cardiovascular defibrillators should check with the manufacturer of the apparatus to confirm the effect of the electromagnetic waves used by
the MiEV Remote System. The electromagnetic waves may affect the operations
of the electro-medical apparatus.
Never use the MiEV Remote near medical equipment. Electromagnetic waves
could adversely affect the medical equipment.
Keep the MiEV Remote in the place
where children will not touch or play
with the remote.
When bringing the MiEV Remote on
flights, do not press any switches on the
MiEV Remote while on the plane. If a
switch is pressed on the plane, the MiEV
Remote emits electromagnetic waves
which like cell phones and other wireless
devices, could interfere with systems on
the airplane.
When carrying the MiEV Remote in a
bag, be careful that no switches on the
MiEV Remote can be pressed by mistake.
CAUTION
l Melody and buzzer from the MiEV Remote
l Never
l
disassemble or modify the MiEV
Remote. No user serviceable parts are inside except batteries.
Disassembling or modifying the MiEV Remote or removing a label from the MiEV
Remote may violate regulations.
l
l
l
NOTE
l The MiEV Remote system uses radio waves.
The MiEV Remote can operate within approximately 100 m from the vehicle.
In the following environments or situations,
the MiEV Remote may not transmit and receive radio waves correctly. As a result, the
remote may not operate properly.
• When the vehicle and the MiEV Remote
are separated by a concrete wall.
• When there is a metal wall between the
vehicle and the MiEV Remote.
• When the vehicle is surrounded by other
tall vehicles.
• When the vehicle and/or the MiEV Remote is near a facility emitting strong radio waves, such as a television tower, a
transformer substation, a broadcasting station or an airport.
• When other electrical equipment such as
computers or cell-phones are placed near
the MiEV Remote.
• When the MiEV Remote touches something metallic, or is covered by a metal object.
• When batteries for the MiEV Remote are
weak.
OHAE12E5
l
can be turned on or off.
Refer to “To turn on/off melody and buzzer”
on page 1-24.
The transmitter signal will reach further
when the antenna of the MiEV Remote is
fully extended and held upright.
The onboard antenna is printed on the right
side delta glass of the vehicle.
When the MiEV Remote is not used for
more than 30 seconds, the MiEV Remote
will automatically turn off.
Some charge facilities have a timer function
which turns the power supply on and off automatically. When using a charge facility
with this timer function, please adjust the
charging time set by the MiEV Remote to be
consistent with the timer used by of the charging facility.
Charging
MiEV Remote
E08301900019
3. The manual charge switch ON timer, OFF
timer and Remote Climate Control are cancelled by pressing this switch.
4. Ring
5. UP switch
Preset time is increased by pressing this
switch.
6. DOWN switch
Preset time is decreased by pressing this
switch.
7. Display
8. Antenna
NOTE
l When
you need additional MiEV Remotes,
please contact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Authorized Service Point. Up to four MiEV
Remotes can be used per vehicle.
1- The indicator blinks during communication
with the vehicle.
If a communication error occurs, the indicator blinks rapidly.
2- The indicator lights up during charging. The
indicator blinks when the manual charging
button is pressed. The indicator will rapidly
blink, if EV charging cable (regular charger)
is not connected when the timer charging or
Remote Climate Control is set.
3- When communicating with the vehicle, the
MiEV Remote display blinks if a communication error occurs or the MiEV Remote is
not functioning properly. If the buzzer
sounds while this indicator blinks, a problem
has been detected. Refer to “Actions to be taken when the system does not operate correctly” on page 1-26.
NOTE
l The
buzzer can be turned off. Refer to “To
turn on/off melody and buzzer” on page
1-24.
1. Power/communication switch
l When the MiEV Remote is off, the
MiEV Remote can be activated by pressing the switch for 1 second or more.
l When the MiEV Remote is on, the MiEV
Remote will communicate with the vehicle by pressing the switch for less than 1
second.
l When the MiEV Remote is on, the MiEV
Remote can be turned off by pressing the
switch for 3 seconds or more.
2. MODE switch
The display of the MiEV Remote is changed
in the order of “ON timer”, “OFF timer” and
“Remote Climate Control” by pressing this
switch.
4- The indicator shows the charge status of the
traction battery using dots. When the Remote
Climate Control is set, the indicator
will blink if the traction battery is empty on
charge.
NOTE
l The condition of the MiEV Remote’s battery
is not displayed.
5Display
OHAE12E5
: When this is shown, time set by ON
timer is shown on 6.
: When this is shown, time set by
OFF timer is shown on 6.
1-15
1
Charging
6- Time set by ON timer or OFF timer is shown.
7- When the Remote Climate Control is set, the
display lights up.
COOL: Pre-Cooling Mode
HEAT: Pre-Heating Mode
: Pre-Defroster Mode
A/C OFF: Remote Climate Control OFF
1
CAUTION
l
l
l
Never leave the MiEV Remote in a place
where it will be subject to high temperatures, such as in direct sunlight, or subject to extreme low temperatures.
The MiEV Remote can be damaged and
may not properly operate.
Never drop or hit the MiEV Remote. Do
not apply force to bend the antenna.
These can cause damage to or failure of
the remote.
If the MiEV Remote gets wet, please wipe
water off immediately. Water entering
the MiEV Remote can cause a failure.
l EV charging cable (regular charger): Connected
WARNING
l Improper charging can result in fire, property damage, and serious injury or death.
Before timer charging, carefully read and
follow the instructions in “Basic knowledge for charging” on page 1-02 and “Regular charging (charging method with rated AC 220-240 V outlet)” on page 1-06.
NOTE
l Timer charging cannot be used with a quick
charging system.
Timer Charging
E08302000017
The Timer Charging can be set as follows.
l ON timer: Time from the present to when
charging will begin.
l OFF timer: Time from the start of charging
to the end of charging
To set the timer, the following conditions must be
met.
l Selector lever: “P” (PARK) position
l Electric motor switch: “LOCK”position
1-16
OHAE12E5
Charging
Example of Timer Charging
E08302100018
1. Setting of ON Timer = 2h, OFF Timer = 8h
2. When Charging timers are set up, initially 4h for ON-Timer
and 8h for OFF-Timer are displayed.
1
Charging
Waiting
ON Timer = 2h
OFF Timer = 8h
ON-Timer initial
display = 4h
OHAE12E5
OFF-Timer initial
display = 8h
1-17
Charging
The remaining time can be changed within
the range from 0 to 19.5 hours in half hour increments.
To turn the MiEV Remote ON/OFF
E08302200019
1
1. Extend the antenna (A) and press the power/
communication switch (B) for 1 second or
more to turn the MiEV Remote on. When it
properly communicates with the vehicle, the
vehicle information will be displayed on the
screen.
NOTE
l The
remaining time for the last charging is
displayed with blinking as follows.
Example: If you set the charging starting
time to 11:00 PM of the day before:
2. To turn the MiEV Remote off, press the power/communication switch (B) for 3 seconds
or more and store the antenna (A).
To set the ON timer
E08302300010
1. Start the regular charging. Refer to “Regular
charging (charging method with rated AC
220-240 V outlet)” on page 1-06.
2. Turn on the MiEV Remote. Refer to “To
turn the MiEV Remote ON/OFF” on page
1-18.
3. Press the UP switch (C) or the DOWN
switch (D) once. The time remaining from
the present to the time that was previously
set for the ON timer will be displayed and
blink.
1-18
Present time
Remaining time
Display
9:00 PM
2:00
2h
9:10 PM
1:50
2h
9:40 PM
1:20
1.5h
the MiEV Remote cannot communicate
with the vehicle, the remaining time will not
be displayed.
l If
4. If you need to change the remaining time for
the ON timer, press the UP switch (C) or the
DOWN switch (D) to change the remaining
time.
OHAE12E5
NOTE
l When
l
you want to start the charging at the
same time as last time, changing the remaining time is unnecessary.
When the remaining time is set to 0h, the
charging starts immediately after step 5.
5. Press the power/communication switch (B)
for less than 1 second to send the setting data
to the vehicle.
The MiEV Remote will sound melodies on
transmission and reception.
NOTE
l The melodies can be turned off. Refer to “To
turn on/off melody and buzzer” on page
1-24.
Charging
l If a communication error occurs or the MiEV
l
l
go off, and the vehicle will be prepared for
the timer charging.
Remote System is not functioning properly,
the buzzer will sound. Refer to “Display of
MiEV Remote during communicating with
vehicle” on page 1-21.
If the OFF Timer is unset when setting the
ON timer, the OFF timer will be automatically set with “fully charged”.
To set OFF Timer, refer to “To set OFF Timer” on page 1-20.
To start the charging immediately after the ON
timer has been set
E08302400011
1. Turn on the MiEV Remote. Refer to “To
turn the MiEV Remote ON/OFF” on page
1-18.
2. Press the UP switch (C) or the DOWN
switch (D) once, and the remaining time
from the present to the time set for the ON
timer will be displayed and blink.
Energy level gauge
6. To turn off the MiEV Remote, refer to “To
turn the MiEV Remote ON/OFF” on page
1-18.
NOTE
l The energy level gauge in the instrument pan-
el on the vehicle will illuminate and the charging indicator will blink approximately 30 seconds after the vehicle has received the setting
for the ON timer.
After approximately 30 seconds, the energy
level gauge and the charging indicator will
Charging indicator
l Turning
l
l
l
the electric motor switch to the
“ON” position or the “ACC” position will cancel the timer charging.
If the MODE switch is pressed while changing the ON timer setting, the change will be
cancelled.
The
symbol on the MiEV Remote will
be illuminated while the vehicle is charging.
If the charge connector is disconnected before the time set by the ON timer, the timer
charging is not cancelled. If the charge connector is re-connected again before starting
the charge or setting the charge timers, the
timer charging will resume.
OHAE12E5
3. Change the remaining time to 0h by pressing
the UP switch (C) or the DOWN switch (D).
4. Press the power/communication switch (B)
for less than 1 second to send the setting data
to the vehicle. The MiEV Remote will sound
melodies on transmission and reception. The
charging will start.
Refer to “Regular charging (charging method
with rated AC 220-240 V outlet)” on page
1-06.
5. Turn off the MiEV Remote. Refer to “To
turn the MiEV Remote ON/OFF” on page
1-18.
1-19
1
Charging
To set OFF Timer
E08302500012
1
The OFF timer can be set during the regular charging or after setting the ON timer.
1. When the power of MiEV Remote is off,
turn the power on. Refer to “To turn the
MiEV Remote ON/OFF” on page 1-18.
2. Press the MODE switch (E) to change the display to the OFF timer (2).
The time set last time for the OFF timer will
be displayed and blink.
NOTE
l The melodies can be turned off. Refer to “To
l
l
1- Shown the ON timer
2- Shown the OFF timer
3- Shown the Remote Climate Control
3. Press the UP switch (C) or the DOWN
switch (D) once.
4. If you need to change the time for the OFF
timer, press the UP switch (C) or the DOWN
switch (D) to change the time.
l The time can be changed within the range
from 0.5h to 19.5h by half hour and can
be changed to “-h”.
l When “-h” is displayed, the charging will
end when the traction battery is fully
charged.
NOTE
l To
display “-h”, press the UP switch (C)
when 19.5h is displayed or press the DOWN
switch (D) when 0.5h is displayed.
5. Press the power/communication switch (B)
for less than 1 second to send the setting data
to the vehicle.
The MiEV Remote will sound melodies on
transmission and reception.
1-20
OHAE12E5
turn on/off melody and buzzer” on page
1-24.
If a communication error occurs or the MiEV
Remote System is not functioning properly,
the buzzer will sound. Refer to “Display of
MiEV Remote during communicating with
vehicle” on page 1-21.
If the ON timer is unset when setting the
OFF timer, the ON timer will be automatically set with “0h”.
6. Turn off the MiEV Remote. Refer to “To
turn the MiEV Remote ON/OFF” on page
1-18.
NOTE
l The energy level gauge in the instrument panel will illuminate and the charging indicator
will blink approximately 30 seconds after the
vehicle has received the setting for the OFF
timer.
After approximately 30 seconds, the energy
level gauge and the charging indicator will
then go off, and the vehicle will be prepared
Charging
for timer charging in accordance with the ON/
OFF setting.
Display of MiEV Remote during communicating
with vehicle
E08302600013
It communicates with the vehicle when the power
of the MiEV Remote is turned on with pressing the
power supply/communication switch (B) for 1 second or more and if the power supply/communication switch (B) is pressed for less than 1 second
while the power of the MiEV Remote is on.
If the normal reception melody sounds after the
transmitting melody, it is set completion.
Communication symbol (F) blinks while communicating with the vehicle.
If the buzzer sounds and the ERROR symbol (G)
blinks, a problem is detected. Refer to “Actions to
be taken when the system does not operate correctly” on page 1-26.
Energy level gauge
Charging indicator
l The
l
l
l
symbol on the MiEV Remote illuminates while the traction battery is charging.
The timer charging will be cancelled if the
electric motor switch is turned to the “ON”
or “ACC” position.
Once the traction battery is fully charged, the
charging will end even if this is before the
time set by the OFF timer.
If the charge connector is disconnected during charging, the OFF charging timer will be
cancelled.
NOTE
l If the timer charging is cancelled during chargl
l
ing, the charging will continue until the traction battery is fully charged.
If the timer charging is cancelled before charging starts, charging will start immediately
and continue until the traction battery is fully
charged.
Timer charging cannot be cancelled by disconnecting the charge connector before the
time set by the ON timer. The timer charging
will resume when the charging connector is
again connected to the vehicle.
A- By using the MiEV Remote
1. When the power of MiEV Remote is off,
turn the power ON. Refer to “To turn the
MiEV Remote ON/OFF” on page 1-18.
2. Press the manual charging switch (H),
then press the power/communication
switch (B) for less than 1 second.
To cancel Timer Charging
E08302700014
There are two methods to cancel Timer Charging.
l By using the MiEV Remote
l By operating the electric motor switch on the
vehicle
OHAE12E5
1-21
1
Charging
NOTE
l If the manual charging switch (H) is pressed,
E08302800015
symbol of MiEV Remote will blink.
the
The Remote Climate Control is also stopped.
1
3. Cancelling timer charging is complete,
and the MiEV Remote will sound two different melodies.
4. Turn off the MiEV Remote. Refer to “To
turn the MiEV Remote ON/OFF” on
page 1-18.
B- By operating the electric motor switch on the
vehicle
Turn the electric motor switch to the “ACC”
or “ON” position, then turn back to the
“LOCK” position.
Cancelling the timer charging is now complete.
l The Remote Climate Control is operated by
Remote Climate Control
WARNING
l The Remote Climate Control, even when
l
set, cannot be relied upon to maintain
safe vehicle cabin temperatures while the
vehicle is stopped or parked. Never leave
children or persons requiring supervision/
nursing unattended inside the vehicle.
The temperature inside the vehicle could
become extremely high or low resulting
in a risk of heat stroke or hyperthermia
that could result in death.
In addition, children can activate
switches and controls, resulting in injury
or a fatal accident.
While the Remote Climate Control is activated, keep away from the cooling fan under the bonnet, since the cooling fan may
automatically operate even if the electric
motor switch is in the “LOCK” position.
NOTE
l The
l
1-22
l
Remote Climate Control works regardless of the position of the air conditioning
switch or dial on the vehicle. While the Remote Climate Control is activated, the air conditioning switch or dial on the vehicle will
not affect operation of the cooler, heater or
defroster.
The Remote Climate Control will automatically stop 30 minutes after the Remote Climate Control has been set.
OHAE12E5
l
l
electric power supplied through the EV charging cable (regular charger).
Under the following conditions, the effect of
the Remote Climate Control can be decreased.
• When the outside temperature is very high.
• When the sunlight is strong.
• When the outside temperature is very low.
When the Remote Climate Control is activated while charging the traction battery, the
time required to fully charge the traction battery will become longer or the amount of
charge may decrease if the OFF timer has
been set.
While the Remote Climate Control is activated, if a heated seat switch is ON, the heated
seat will operate.
To operate the Remote Climate Control
E08302900016
The following conditions must be met to operate
the Remote Climate Control.
l Selector lever: P (PARK) position.
l Electric motor switch: LOCK position.
l EV charging cable (regular charger): Connected.
l Quick charging: Not used.
l Traction Battery Level Indicator: Shows one
bar or more.
Refer to “Traction Battery Level Indicator”
on page 1-24.
l All doors and the liftgate: Closed.
Charging
NOTE
WARNING
l
l The melodies can be turned off. Refer to “To
Improper charging can result in fire, property damage, and serious injury or death.
Carefully read and follow instructions in
“Basic knowledge for charging” on page
1-02 and “Charging method with rated
AC 220-240 V outlet” on page 1-07.
1. Start charging. Refer to “Charging method
with rated AC 220-240 V outlet” on page
1-07.
2. Turn on the MiEV Remote. Refer to “To
turn the MiEV Remote ON/OFF” on page
1-18.
3. Press the MODE switch (E) to change the
mode to Remote Climate Control (3).
1- Shown the ON timer
2- Shown the OFF timer
3- Shown the Remote Climate Control
4. Select a desired mode by pressing UP switch
(C) or DOWN switch (D).
l
The modes will be changed in the order from
1 to 4 by pushing the UP switch.
turn on/off melody and buzzer” on page
1-24.
If a communication error occurs or the MiEV
Remote System is not functioning properly,
the buzzer will sound. Refer to “Display of
MiEV Remote during communicating with
vehicle” on page 1-21.
6. Turn off the MiEV Remote. Refer to “To
turn the MiEV Remote ON/OFF” on page
1-18.
To stop the Remote Climate Control
E08303000014
1- COOL: Pre-Cooling Mode
2- HEAT: Pre-Heating Mode
3: Pre-Defroster Mode
4- A/C OFF: Remote Climate Control OFF
5. Press the power/communication switch (B)
for less than 1 second to send the setting to
the vehicle. The MiEV Remote will sound
melodies on transmission and reception.
OHAE12E5
The Remote Climate Control can be stopped by either of the following methods.
A- Send by MiEV Remote after pressing the manual charging switch.
B- By using the MiEV Remote, select the A/C
OFF mode and send the setting. Refer to “To
operate the Remote Climate Control” on
page 1-22.
C- Turn the electric motor switch to the “ACC”
or the “ON” position.
D- Disconnect the regular charge connector
from the vehicle.
NOTE
l The Remote Climate Control will not stop if
the doors or liftgate are opened after the Remote Climate Control has started.
1-23
1
Charging
Replacement of batteries for the
MiEV Remote
To turn on/off melody and buzzer
E08303100015
1
1. Turn on the MiEV Remote. Refer to “To
turn the MiEV Remote ON/OFF” on page
1-18.
l To turn off the sounds, press the UP
switch (C) while pressing MODE switch
(E).
l To turn on the sounds, press the DOWN
switch (D) while pressing MODE switch
(E).
E08303300017
CAUTION
l
l
The remaining energy is shown by the number of segments displayed.
: 3 segments: Full or nearly full
Traction Battery Level Indicator
E08303200016
The remaining energy in the traction battery can be
checked using the MiEV Remote.
1. If the MiEV Remote has been turned off,
turn on the MiEV Remote. Refer to “To turn
the MiEV Remote ON/OFF” on page 1-18.
2. Current remaining energy in the traction battery is shown on the display while the MiEV
Remote is ON.
1-24
About the battery
E08303400018
: 2 segments: Moderate
Two coin type batteries are used. Replace if necessary to assure proper operation.
: 1 segment: Low
NOTE
: 0 segments: Empty or nearly empty
2. Turn off the MiEV Remote. Refer to “To
turn the MiEV Remote ON/OFF” on page
1-18.
MiEV Remote is a precision electronic device with a built-in signal transmitter. Do
not disassemble or touch internal parts.
Keep away from water or dust.
Be careful not to break the tab on the battery cover when removing or installing
the battery cover.
NOTE
l More
remaining quantity in the
than
traction battery is necessary to operate the Remote Climate Control.
3. Turn off the MiEV Remote. Refer to “To
turn the MiEV Remote ON/OFF” on page
1-18.
OHAE12E5
l Standard battery life on the MiEV Remote is
about 1 year. Battery life can vary depending
on environmental and usage conditions.
To replace the batteries
E08303500019
1. Before replacing the batteries, remove static
electricity from your body by touching a metal grounded object.
Charging
2. The battery cover (B) lifts when the slide portion (A) is moved to the direction indicated
by the arrow.
5. Install two new batteries (D) with the “+”
side up.
1
Coin type batteries
CR2032
3. By moving the battery cover (B) in the direction indicated by the arrow, the tabs (C) on
the battery cover will come out and the battery cover can be removed.
6. Attach the battery cover (A) in the reverse order from the way you have detached it.
7. Confirm the MiEV Remote can be turned
ON. Refer to “To turn the MiEV Remote ON/
OFF” on page 1-18.
NOTE
l Replace both batteries with new ones at the
same time.
l If you prefer, you can have the batteries re-
placed by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
4. Remove the old batteries.
OHAE12E5
1-25
Charging
Actions to be taken when the system does not operate correctly
E08303600010
Take the following actions when the system does not operate correctly. If the system still does not operate correctly after the action(s) have been taken, a system
component may not be working properly. Please consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point to check it.
Phenomena
Charging does not start when the regular charge connector is inserted.
1
Cause
“ON” timer has been set.
Remedy
Cancel the “ON” timer.
The regular charge connector is not Lock the regular charge connector selocked completely.
curely.
A household electrical outlet, which Turn on the household electrical outlet
the EV charging cable is connected to, which the EV charging cable is connecis shut down.(e.g. disconnected plug) ted to.
MiEV Remote does not operate normal- MiEV Remote is not powered on.
Batteries in the MiEV Remote are de- Replace the batteries in the MiEV Rely.
fective.
mote.
All indicators are off when the power
Refer to “Replacement of batteries for
supply/communication switch is pressthe MiEV Remote” on page 1-24.
ed to make the system communicate.
Melody or buzzer does not sound.
The following symbol blinks when the Blinks after about 1 second.
power supply/communication switch
on the MiEV Remote is pressed.
l ERROR symbol
l
1-26
symbol
Melody or buzzer has been disabled.
l Noise source is present in the vil
cinity of the MiEV Remote.(e.g.
personal computer)
Noise source is present between
the vehicle and the MiEV Remote.
OHAE12E5
Enable the melody or buzzer.
Refer to “To turn on/off melody and
buzzer” on page 1-24.
Go away from the noise source.
Charging
Phenomena
Blinks after about 10 seconds.
Cause
Remedy
Out of effective communication range Move to the location where the system
around the vehicle.(e.g. too far away reaches the effective communication
from the vehicle, or radio signal is in- range.
terfered)
The electric motor switch is at the posi- Turn the electric motor switch to the
tion other than “LOCK” position.
“LOCK” position.
l Noise source is present in the vil
Go away from the noise source.
cinity of the vehicle.
Noise source is present between
the vehicle and the MiEV Remote.
Auxiliary battery is discharged.
Charge or replace the auxiliary battery.
Refer to “Emergency starting” on page
7-02, “Low voltage electrical system”
on page 9-04.
The MiEV Remote antenna is not ex- Extend the MiEV Remote antenna to
tended.
communicate.
The symbol below blinks when the power/communication switch on the MiEV The system is in processing.
Remote is pressed.
l ERROR symbol
OHAE12E5
Press the power/communication switch
again.
1-27
1
Charging
Phenomena
Timer charging is not possible.
1
Cause
After the power/communication switch Regular charge connector is not inseris pressed, the following symbol blinks ted or not locked completely.
for several seconds.
A household electrical outlet, to which
l ERROR symbol
the EV charging cable (regular chargl
er) is connected, is shut down.(e.g. dissymbol
connected plug)
Remedy
Lock the regular charge connector securely.
Turn on the household electrical outlet
to which the EV charging cable (regular charger) is connected.
An earth leakage circuit breaker at the Check the earth leakage circuit breaker
household electrical outlet is working. and the power supply cut.
Otherwise, the power supply at the
household electrical outlet is cut off.
If the charging unit is equipped with Preset the timer charging while the
the timer function, the power supply to charging unit with timer function is
the unit has been cut off.
powered on.
After the power/communication switch The selector lever is at the position othis pressed, the following symbol blinks er than P (PARK).
for several seconds.
Quick charging is in progress. (The
l ERROR symbol
symbol illuminates.)
Set the selector lever to the “P”
(PARK) position.
Terminate the quick charging, or wait
until the quick charging completes.
The temperature of the traction battery Allow the temperature of the traction
has exceeded about 60 °C.
battery to reach normal operating temperature. Refer to “Cautions and actions to deal with intense heat” on page
06.
The temperature of the traction battery Allow the temperature of the traction
has been under about -25 °C.
battery to reach normal operating temperature. Refer to “Cautions and actions to deal with intense cold” on page
08.
1-28
OHAE12E5
Charging
Phenomena
Timed charging is impossible.
Cause
Charging is preset, but the specified
charging level is not satisfied.
l The charging level is not expected amount.
l Is not charged.
l Is not charged at the preset time.
Remedy
The timer is cancelled or the preset Check whether another person has optime is changed by using another erated his or her MiEV Remote.
MiEV Remote.
The electric motor switch has been op- Check whether the electric motor
erated before the system is charged.
switch has been operated before the system is charged.
The temperature of the traction battery Allow the temperature of the traction
has exceeded about 60 °C.
battery to reach normal operating temperature. Refer to “Cautions and actions to deal with intense heat” on page
06.
The temperature of the traction battery Allow the temperature of the traction
has been under about -25 °C.
battery to reach normal operating temperature. Refer to “Cautions and actions to deal with intense cold” on page
08.
Timer charging is not preset correctly.
Although the charging is preset, too The Remote Climate Control has been
much time is needed to charge the sys- activated.
tem fully.
Temperature of the traction battery is
low.
It is not fully charged.
Preset the timed charging again.
Check whether the Remote Climate
Control has been activated.
Refer to “Cautions and actions to deal
with intense cold” on page 08.
If the charging unit is equipped with Preset the timer charging while the
the timer function, the power supply to charging unit with timer function is
the unit has been cut off.
powered on.
OHAE12E5
1-29
1
Charging
Phenomena
1
Cause
The Remote Climate Control cannot be After the power/communication switch The regular charge connector is not inactivated.
is pressed, the following symbol blinks serted or it is not locked completely.
for several seconds.
A household electrical outlet, to which
l ERROR symbol
the EV charging cable (regular charge)
l
is connected, is shut down.(e.g. disconsymbol
nected plug)
Remedy
Lock the regular charge connector securely.
Turn on the household electrical outlet
to which the EV charging cable (regular charger) is connected.
An earth leakage circuit breaker at the Check the earth leakage circuit breaker
household electrical outlet is working. and the power supply cut.
Otherwise, the power supply at the
household electrical outlet is cut off.
If the charging unit is equipped with Preset the timer charging while the
the timer function, the power supply to charging unit with timer function is
the unit has been cut off.
powered on.
After the power/communication switch The traction battery charging level is Charge the traction battery until the
is pressed, the following symbol blinks low.
MiEV Remote illuminates the battery
for several seconds.
charging level by at least 1 segment.
l ERROR symbol
l
1-30
symbol
OHAE12E5
Charging
Phenomena
Cause
The Remote Climate Control cannot be After the power/communication switch Any of the doors or liftgate is open.
activated.
is pressed, the following symbol blinks
The selector lever is at the position othfor several seconds.
er than P (PARK).
l ERROR symbol
Quick charging is in progress.
(The
symbol will illuminate.)
Remedy
Close all the doors and liftgate.
Set the selector lever to the “P”
(PARK) position.
Terminate the quick charging, or wait
until the quick charging completes.
The temperature of the traction battery Allow the temperature of the traction
has exceeded about 60 °C.
battery to reach normal operating temperature. Refer to “Cautions and actions to deal with intense heat” on page
06.
The temperature of the traction battery Allow the temperature of the traction
has been under about -25 °C.
battery to reach normal operating temperature. Refer to “Cautions and actions to deal with intense cold” on page
08.
The Remote Climate Control is not ac- The electric motor switch has been op- Check whether the electric motor
tivated.
erated before the system is charged.
switch has been operated before the system is charged.
The temperature of the traction battery Allow the temperature of the traction
has exceeded about 60 °C.
battery to reach normal operating temperature. Refer to “Cautions and actions to deal with intense heat” on page
06.
The temperature of the traction battery Allow the temperature of the traction
has been under about -25 °C.
battery to reach normal operating temperature. Refer to “Cautions and actions to deal with intense cold” on page
08.
The Remote Climate Control cannot be The heated seat is not powered on.
The heated seat switch is turned off.
activated.
The heated seat becomes hot while the The heated seat switch is turned on.
air conditioning (cooling) is activated.
OHAE12E5
Turn on the heated seat switch.
Turn off the heated seat switch.
1-31
1
Charging
Cleaning the MiEV Remote
E08303700011
1
1. Gently wipe with gauze or another soft cloth
soaked with a 3 % aqueous solution of neutral detergent.
2. Wipe off all the detergent with a soft cloth
dipped in fresh water and thoroughly wrung
out.
3. Wipe all moisture off and dry in a shaded,
well-ventilated area.
CAUTION
l
1-32
Never use benzine, petrol, or other organic solvents, or acid or alkaline solvents. Doing so could cause deformation, discolour, or malfunction. Also, these substances may be present in various cleaners, so
check carefully before use.
OHAE12E5
Locking and unlocking
Keys..............................................................................................2-02
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system).....................2-02
Keyless entry system....................................................................2-03
Doors............................................................................................2-05
Central door locks.........................................................................2-06
“Child-protection” rear doors.......................................................2-07
Tailgate.........................................................................................2-08
Electric window control................................................................2-09
OHAE12E5
2
Locking and unlocking
Keys
l The key is a precision electronic device with
E00300102399
Two keys are provided. The key fits all locks.
Keep one in a safe place as a spare key.
2
WARNING
l
When taking a key on flights, do not
press any switches on the key while on
the plane. If a switch is pressed on the
plane, the key emits electromagnetic
waves, which could adversely affect the
plane’s flight operation.
When carrying a key in a bag, be careful
that no switches on the key can be easily
pressed by mistake.
l
a built-in signal transmitter. Please observe
the following in order to prevent malfunctioning.
• Do not leave the key anywhere where exposed to direct sunlight, for example on
the dashboard.
• Do not disassemble or modify.
• Do not excessively bend the key or subject it to strong impacts.
• Do not expose to water.
• Keep away from magnetic key rings.
• Keep away from audio systems, personal
computers, TVs, and other equipment
that generates a magnetic field.
• Keep away from devices that emit strong
electromagnetic waves, such as cellular
phones, wireless devices and high frequency equipment (including medical devices).
• Do not clean with ultrasonic cleaners or
similar equipment.
• Do not leave the key where it may be exposed to high temperature or high humidity.
The electric motor unit is designed so that it
will not start if the ID code registered in the
immobilizer computer and the key’s ID code
do not match. Refer to the “Electronic immobilizer” section for details and key usage.
NOTE
l The key number is stamped on the tag as in-
dicated in the illustration.
Make a record of the key number and store
the key and key number tag in separate places, so that you can order a key in the event
the original keys are lost.
2-02
OHAE12E5
Electronic immobilizer (Antitheft starting system)
E00300201928
The electronic immobilizer is designed to significantly reduce the possibility of vehicle theft. The
purpose of the system is to immobilize the vehicle
if an invalid start is attempted. A valid start attempt
can only be achieved by using a key “registered” to
the immobilizer system.
NOTE
l In
the following cases, the vehicle may not
be able to receive the registered ID code
from the registered key and the electric motor unit may not start.
• When the key contacts a key ring or other
metallic or magnetic object (Type A)
• When the key grip contacts metal of another key (Type B)
Locking and unlocking
• When the key contacts or is close to other
immobilizing keys (including keys of other vehicles) (Type C)
In cases like these, remove the object or
additional key from the vehicle key and
turn the key back to the “ACC” or
“LOCK” position. Then try again to start
the electric motor unit. If the electric motor unit does not start, we recommend
you to contact your MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
Keyless entry system
l Two keys are provided.
If you lose one of them, order a key from
your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
Service Point as soon as possible.
To obtain a replacement or extra spare key,
take your vehicle and any remaining key to
your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
Service Point. All the keys have to be registered in the immobilizer computer unit. The
immobilizer can register up to 8 different keys.
E00300302434
Press the remote control switch, and all doors and
the tailgate will be locked or unlocked as desired.
2
CAUTION
l Don’t
make any alterations or additions
to the immobilizer system; alterations or
additions could cause failure of the immobilizer.
1- LOCK switch
2- UNLOCK switch
3- Indication lamp
To lock
Press the LOCK switch (1), and all doors and the
tailgate will be locked. When they are locked with
the room lamp at the middle (•) position or at the
“DOOR” position, the room lamp and the turn-signal lamps blink once.
To unlock
Press the UNLOCK switch (2), and all doors and
the tailgate will be unlocked. When unlocked with
the room lamp at the (•) position or at the “DOOR”
position, the room lamp will be turned on for approximately 15 seconds and the turn-signal lamps
will blink twice.
OHAE12E5
2-03
Locking and unlocking
• The remote control switch is operated at
the correct distance from the vehicle, but
the doors and the tailgate are not locked/
unlocked in response.
• The indication lamp (3) is dim or does
not come on.
NOTE
l The indication lamp (3) comes on each time
a switch is pressed.
the UNLOCK switch (2) is pressed and
any of the doors or the tailgate is not opened
within approximately 30 seconds, relocking
will automatically occur.
It is possible to modify functions as follows:
For further information, please contact your
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
Point.
• The time for automatic relocking can be
changed.
• The confirmation function (flashing of
the turn-signal lamps) can be set to operate only when the doors and the tailgate
are locked or only when the doors and
the tailgate are unlocked.
• The confirmation function (this indicates
locking or unlocking of the doors and the
tailgate with the flash of the turn-signal
lamps) can be deactivated.
• The number of times the turn-signal
lamps are flashed by the confirmation
function can be changed.
The keyless entry system does not operate in
the following conditions:
• The key is left in the key cylinder.
• The door or the tailgate is open.
The remote control switch will operate within approximately 4 m from the vehicle. However, the operating range of the remote control switch may change if the vehicle is located near a power station, or radio/TV broadcasting station.
If either of the following problems occurs,
the battery may be exhausted.
l If
l
2
l
l
l
2-04
l
l
For further information, please contact
your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
If you replace the battery yourself, refer
to “Procedure for replacing the remote
control switch battery” on page 2-04.
If your remote control switch is lost or damaged, please contact your MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point for a replacement remote control switch.
If you wish to add a remote control switch,
we recommend you to contact a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
Point.
A maximum of 4 remote control switches are
available for your vehicle.
Operation of the outside rear-view mirrors
E00310800119
To fold
Within 30 seconds of locking the doors and the tailgate using the LOCK switch (1), press the LOCK
switch twice rapidly to fold the outside rear-view
mirrors.
To extend
Within 30 seconds of unlocking the doors and the
tailgate using the UNLOCK switch (2), press the
UNLOCK switch twice rapidly to return the outside rear-view mirrors to their extended positions.
OHAE12E5
Procedure for replacing the remote
control switch battery
E00309500204
1. Before replacing the battery, remove static
electricity from your body by touching a metal part such as doorknob of the room.
2. Remove the screw (A) from the remote control switch.
3. With the MITSUBISHI mark facing you, insert the clothcovered tip of a straight blade
(or minus) screwdriver into the notch in the
remote control switch case and use it to open
the case.
Locking and unlocking
NOTE
Doors
6. Install a new battery with the + side (B) down.
l Be
sure to perform the procedure with the
MITSUBISHI mark facing you. If the
MITSUBISHI mark is not facing you when
you open the remote control switch case, the
switches may come out.
E00300402187
+ side
CAUTION
l
4. Remove the remote control transmitter from
the remote control switch case. Then, open
the remote control transmitter using the method described in step 3.
- side
Coin type battery
CR1616
7. Close the remote control transmitter firmly.
8. Place the remote control transmitter in the remote control switch case, then securely close
the remote control switch case.
9. Attach the screw (A) removed in step 2.
10. Check the keyless entry system to see that it
works.
l
l
Make sure the doors are closed: driving
with doors not completely closed is dangerous.
Never leave children in the vehicle unattended.
Be careful not to lock the doors while the
key is inside the vehicle.
NOTE
l To prevent the key from being locked inside
the vehicle, neither the lock knob on the driver’s door nor the key can be used to lock the
driver’s door when it is open.
To lock or unlock with the key
NOTE
5. Remove the old battery.
l You
l
may purchase a replacement battery at
an electric appliance store.
A MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point can replace the battery for you if
you prefer.
CAUTION
l
When the remote control switch case is
opened, be careful to keep water, dust,
etc. out. Also, do not touch the internal
components.
OHAE12E5
1- Lock
2- Unlock
2-05
2
Locking and unlocking
To lock or unlock from inside the vehicle
Central door locks
To lock without using the key
E00300801852
NOTE
l Each of the doors can be locked or unlocked
independently by using the inside lock knob.
l Repeated continuous operation between lock
and unlock could activate the central door
locking systems built-in protection circuit
and prevent the system from operating. If
this occurs, wait about 1 minute before operating the inside lock knob or the key.
2
Driver’s door with key
1- Lock
2- Unlock
Pull the inside door handle towards you to open the
door.
NOTE
Set the inside lock knob (1) to the locked position,
and close the door (2).
Using the key on the driver’s door locks or unlocks
all doors and the tailgate.
NOTE
l The driver’s door cannot be locked using the
inside lock knob while the driver’s door is
opened.
l The driver’s door can be opened without us-
ing the lock knob by pulling on the inside
door handle.
Also, all other doors and the tailgate are unlocked at the same time.
1- Lock
2- Unlock
2-06
OHAE12E5
Locking and unlocking
Driver’s door with inside lock knob
Using the inside lock knob on the driver’s door
locks or unlocks all doors and the tailgate.
NOTE
l The vehicle is shipped from the factory with
“Child-protection” rear doors
E00300901026
a setting established such that the doors and
the tailgate are not unlocked when the selector lever is placed in the “P” position with
the electric motor switch in the “ON” position. If you wish to change the setting such
that the doors and the tailgate are unlocked,
contact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
2
1- Lock
2- Unlock
1- Lock
2- Unlock
Child protection helps prevent the rear doors from
being opened accidentally from the inside.
If the lever is set to the locked position, the rear
door cannot be opened using the inside handle, but
only with the outside handle.
If the lever is set to the “Unlock” position, the
child protection mechanism does not function.
Unlocking doors using selector lever
It is possible to unlock all doors and the tailgate using the selector lever by placing it in the “P” position while the electric motor switch is in the “ON”
position.
CAUTION
l When
driving with a child in the rear
seat, please use the child protection to prevent accidental door opening which may
cause an accident.
OHAE12E5
2-07
Locking and unlocking
Tailgate
To close
E00301401161
WARNING
Pull the tailgate grip (A) downward as illustrated.
Gently push the upper gate from the outside with
enough force so that it is completely closed. Always ensure the tailgate is securely closed.
l When
opening and closing the tailgate,
make sure that there are no people nearby and be careful not to hit your head or
pinch your hands, neck, etc.
2
To open
After unlocking the tailgate, push the switch (A)
and pull up the tailgate.
CAUTION
l When closing the tailgate, always ensure
your or other person’s fingers cannot be
caught by the tailgate.
NOTE
NOTE
l If
l
2-08
you do not open the tailgate immediately
after pulling the handle, the tailgate cannot
be lifted. If this happens, pull the handle
again and lift the tailgate.
The tailgate cannot be opened when the battery is flat or disconnected.
l Gas struts (B) are installed to support the tailgate.
To prevent damage or faulty operation.
• Do not hold the gas struts when closing
the tailgate.
• Also, do not push or pull the gas struts.
• Do not attach any plastic material, tape,
etc., to the gas struts.
• Do not tie string, etc., around the gas struts.
• Do not hang any object on the gas struts.
OHAE12E5
Locking and unlocking
Electric window control
Driver’s switch (RHD)
E00302200550
Press the switch down for opening the door window, and pull up the switch for closing.
The electric windows can only be operated with the
electric motor switch in the “ON” position.
WARNING
l Before operating the electric window conl
l
l
trol, make sure that nothing can get trapped (head, hand, finger, etc.).
Never leave the vehicle without removing
the key.
Never leave a child (or other person who
might not be capable of safe operation of
the electric window control) in the vehicle
alone.
The child may tamper with the switch at
the risk of its hands or head being trapped in the window.
Electric window control switch
E00302301705
Each window opens or closes while the corresponding switch is operated.
Driver’s switch (LHD)
12345-
Driver’s door window
Front passenger’s door window
Rear left door window
Rear right door window
Lock switch
Driver’s switches
The driver’s switches can be used to operate all
door windows.
A window can be opened or closed by operating
the corresponding switch.
Press the switch down to open the window, and
pull up the switch to close it.
If the switch for the driver’s door window is fully
pressed down, the door window automatically
opens completely.
If you want to stop the door window movement,
pull up the switch.
2
NOTE
l Repeated
operation with the electric motor
unit stopped will run down the battery. Operate the window switches only while the electric motor unit is running.
Lock switch
E00303101188
When this switch is operated, the passenger’s
switches cannot be used to open or close the windows and the driver’s switch cannot open or close
any windows other than the driver’s window.
Passenger’s switches
The passenger’s switches can be used to operate
the corresponding passenger’s door windows.
OHAE12E5
2-09
Locking and unlocking
To unlock, press it once again.
2
1- Lock
2- Unlock
WARNING
lA
child may tamper with the switch at
the risk of its hands or head being trapped in the window. When driving with a
child in the vehicle, please press the window lock switch to disable the passenger’s switches.
Timer function
E00302400927
The door windows can be opened or closed for 30
seconds after the electric motor switch is turned
from the “ON” position to the “ACC” or “LOCK”
position.
However, once the driver’s door or the front passenger’s door is opened, the windows cannot be operated.
2-10
OHAE12E5
Seat and seat belts
Seat...............................................................................................3-02
Seat adjustment.............................................................................3-03
Front seat......................................................................................3-03
Rear seat*.....................................................................................3-05
Head restraints..............................................................................3-07
Seat belts.......................................................................................3-08
Pregnant women restraint.............................................................3-10
Seat belt pretensioner system and force limiter system................3-11
Child restraint...............................................................................3-11
Seat belt inspection.......................................................................3-20
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag..............................3-20
OHAE12E5
3
Seat and seat belts
Seat
E00400101960
3
1-Front seat
l To adjust forward or backward ® p. 3-03
l To recline the seatback ® p. 3-04
l To adjust seat height (driver’s seat only) ® p. 3-04
l Heated seat ® p. 3-04
2-Rear seat*
l To recline the seatback ® p. 3-05
l Folding the seatbacks forward ® p. 3-06
3-02
OHAE12E5
Seat and seat belts
Seat adjustment
CAUTION
E00400300633
Adjust the driver’s seat so that you are comfortable
and that you can reach the pedals, steering wheel,
switches etc. while retaining a clear field of vision.
To adjust forward or backward
l
Pull the seat adjusting lever and adjust the seat forward or backward to the desired position, and release the adjusting lever.
l Do
l
l
E00400400197
l Make
WARNING
not attempt to adjust the seat while
driving. This can cause loss of vehicle control and result in an accident. After adjustments are made, ensure the seating is
locked in position by attempting to move
the seat forward and rearward without using the adjusting mechanism.
Do not allow people or children to ride in
any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts, and make
sure that everyone travelling in your vehicle is in a seat and wearing a seat belt, or
in the case of a child is strapped in a child
restraint.
To minimize the risk of personal injury
in the event of a collision or sudden braking, the seatbacks should always be in the
almost upright position while the vehicle
is in motion. The protection provided by
the seat belts may be reduced significantly when the seatback is reclined. There is
greater risk that the passenger will slide
under the seat belt, resulting in serious injury, when the seatback is reclined.
Front seat
l
sure the seat is adjusted by an
adult or with adult supervision for correct and safe operation.
Do not place a cushion or the like between your back and the seatback while
driving. The effectiveness of the head restraints will be reduced in the event of an
accident.
When sliding the seats, be careful not to
catch your hand or foot.
E00400500794
3
WARNING
l To ensure the seat is locked securely, try
to move the seat forward or backward
without using the adjusting lever.
OHAE12E5
3-03
Seat and seat belts
To recline the seatback
E00400601008
In order to recline the seatback, lean forward slightly, pull the seatback lock lever up, and then lean
backward to the desired position and release the lever. The seatback will lock in that position.
To adjust seat height (driver’s seat only)
E00400701054
To adjust the seat height, operate the lever repeatedly.
Heated seat
E00401101071
The heated seat can be operated with the electric
motor switch in the “ON” position. Operate the
switch as indicated by arrows. The heated seat
switch (A) is for the driver’s seat and the switch
(B) is for the passenger’s seat. The indication lamp
(C) will illuminate while the heater is on.
3
1- Raise
2- Lower
CAUTION
l The reclining mechanism of the seatback
is spring loaded, causing it to return to
the vertical position when the lock lever
is operated. When using the lever, sit
close to the seatback or hold it with your
hand to control its return motion.
1- Heater on.
2- Heater off.
CAUTION
l
l
l
3-04
OHAE12E5
Switch off the seat heater when not in use.
Continuous use while the ready indicator
is not illuminated can cause the auxiliary
battery to run down.
If the following types of persons use the
heated seat, they might become too hot or
Seat and seat belts
Rear seat*
CAUTION
l
l
l
l
l
receive minor burns (red skin, heat blisters, etc.):
• Elderly or ill people
• People with sensitive skin
• Excessively tired people
• People under the influence of sleep inducing medication, etc.
Do not place heavy objects on the seat or
stick pins, needles, or other pointed objects into it.
Do not use a blanket, cushion, or other material with high heat insulation properties
on the seat while using the heater; this
might cause the heater element to overheat
Do not use benzine, kerosene, petrol, alcohol or other organic solvents when cleaning the seat. Doing so could damage not
only the seat cover, but also the heater element.
If water or any other liquid is spilled on
the seat, allow it to dry thoroughly before
attempting to use the heater.
Turn the heater off immediately if it appears to be malfunctioning during use.
E00401300425
WARNING
l When a person sits in the rear seat, pull
up the head restraint to a height at which
it locks in position. Be sure to make this
adjustment before starting to drive. Serious injuries could otherwise be suffered
as the result of an impact. Refer to “Head
restraints” on page 3-07.
To recline the seatback
E00401500254
In order to recline the seatback, lean forward slightly, pull the lever, and then lean backward to the desired position and release the lever. The seatback
will lock in that position.
CAUTION
l
Child restraint lower anchorages (A) are
provided between the seat cushion and
the seatback.
Be careful that the lower anchorages may
be hot due to heat of the electric motor
unit room.
OHAE12E5
NOTE
l It is possible to adjust the seatback angle independently on each side.
3-05
3
Seat and seat belts
Folding the seatbacks forward
E00401600330
Larger objects can be loaded into the vehicle if a
seatback is folded forward.
CAUTION
l
3
Do not stack luggage in the vehicle higher
than the seatback height. Also, firmly secure the luggage.
Serious accidents could result due to unrestrained objects entering the passenger
compartment during sudden braking.
To fold
Pull the lever, and fold the rear seatbacks forward.
NOTE
l Do not operate the lever in the wrong direction.
Doing so could damage the lever and make it
impossible to operate the seatback.
3-06
To replace
1. Raise the seatback until it locks securely into
place.
2. Push lightly on the seatback to confirm that
it has actually been secured.
2. Pushing the seat cushion as far back as possible, press the hooks (A) on the underside of
the seat cushion into the right and left stopper installation holes (B) until a click is heard.
Rear seat cushion
E00401900173
The rear seat cushion can be removed. It is removed when the tyre repair kit stored under the
seat cushion is taken out. Use this function when
putting the seat covers on, etc.
To remove
1. Pull the seat stoppers (A) to unlock the seat
cushion (B).
2. Lift up the seat cushion and pull it towards
you to remove it.
To install
1. Place the seat belt’s buckles on top of the
seat cushion.
OHAE12E5
3. After installing the seat cushion, shake it lightly to check that it is properly fixed in position.
Seat and seat belts
Head restraints
E00403301497
WARNING
To raise the head restraint, move it upward. To lower the restraint, move it downward while pushing
the height adjusting knob (A) in the direction of the
arrow. After adjustment, push the head restraint
downward and make sure that it is locked.
Installation
Confirm that they are facing the correct direction,
and then insert them into the seatback while pressing the height adjusting knob (A) in the direction indicated by the arrow.
l Driving
l
without the head restraints in
place can cause you and your passengers
serious injury or death in an accident. To
reduce the risk of injury in an accident, always make sure the head restraints are installed and properly positioned when the
seat is occupied.
Never place a cushion or similar device
on the seatback. This can adversely affect
head restraint performance by increasing
the distance between your head and the
restraint.
To adjust height
Adjust the head restraint height so that the centre
of the head restraint is as close as possible to eye
level to reduce the chances of injury in the event of
collision. Any person too tall for the head restraint
to reach their seated eye level, should adjust the restraint as high as possible.
CAUTION
l
Confirm that the height adjusting knob
(A) is correctly adjusted as shown in the
illustration, and also lift the head restraints to ensure that they do not come
out of the seatback.
3
To remove
Lift the head restraint with the height adjusting
knob (A) pushed in.
CAUTION
l
OHAE12E5
The head restraints for the seats differ in
shape and size. When installing head restraints, make sure the head restraints
are fitted in their respective seats and do
not install the head restraints in the
wrong direction.
3-07
Seat and seat belts
Seat belts
WARNING
E00404800636
To protect you and your passengers in the event of
an accident, it is most important that the seat belts
be worn correctly while driving.
The front seat belts have a pretensioner system.
These belts are used the same way as a conventional seat belt.
Refer to “Seat belt pretensioner system and force
limiter system” on page 3-11
WARNING
l Always place the shoulder belt over your
3
l
l
l
l
3-08
shoulder and across your chest. Never
put it behind you or under your arm.
One seat belt should be used by only one
person. Doing otherwise can be dangerous.
The seat belt will provide its wearer with
maximum protection if the recliner seatback is placed in fully upright position.
When the seatback is reclined, there is
greater risk that the passenger will slide
under the belt, especially in a forward impact accident, and may be injured by the
belt or by striking the instrument panel
or seatbacks.
Seat belts should always be worn by every adult who drives or rides in this vehicle, and by all children who are tall
enough to wear seat belts properly.
Other children should always use proper
child restraint systems.
Remove any twists when using the belt.
OHAE12E5
l
l
l
l
No modifications or additions should be
made by the user which will either prevent the seat belt adjusting devices from
operating to remove slack, or prevent the
seat belt assembly from being adjusted to
remove slack.
Never hold a child in your arms or on
your lap when riding in this vehicle, even
if you are wearing your seat belt. To do
so risks severe or fatal injury to the child
in a collision or sudden stop.
Always adjust the belt to a snug fit.
Always wear the lap portion of the belt
over your hips.
3-point type seat belt (with emergency
locking mechanism)*
E00404901504
This type of belt requires no length adjustment.
Once worn, the belt adjusts itself to the movement
of the wearer, but in the event of a sudden or strong
shock, the belt automatically locks to hold the wearer’s body.
Seat and seat belts
NOTE
l You can check if the belt locks by pulling it
forward quickly.
To fasten
1. Pull the seat belt out slowly while holding
the latch plate.
NOTE
l When the seat belts cannot be pulled out in a
locked condition, pull the belts once forcefully and then return them. After that, pull the
belts out slowly once again.
WARNING
l
The seat belts must not be twisted when
worn.
3. Pull the belt slightly to adjust slackness as desired.
Seat belt warning
E00413000025
Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder/
warning lamp
E00414800020
The driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt warning lamp is located on the instrument panel.
To unfasten
Hold the latch plate and push the button on the buckle.
2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle until a
“click” is heard.
3
NOTE
l As the belt retracts automatically, keep hold-
WARNING
l
ing the latch plate while retracting so that the
belt stows slowly. Failure to do this could
damage the vehicle.
Never wear the lap portion of the belt
across your abdomen. During accidents it
can press sharply against the abdomen
and increase the risk of injury.
OHAE12E5
When the electric motor switch is turned to the
“ON” position, if a driver or a front passenger has
not fastened the seat belt, the warning lamp will illuminate.
Having passed approximately 1 minute since the
electric motor switch is turned to the “ON” position, if the seat belt remains unfastened when the vehicle is driven, the warning lamp will flash and the
tone will sound intermittently for approximately 90
seconds.
If the seat belt subsequently remains unfastened,
the warning lamp and tone will issue further warnings each time the vehicle starts moving from a
stop. And if the passenger unfastens the seat belt
while driving, the warning will operate in the same
way.
When the seat belt is fastened, the warnings will stop.
3-09
Seat and seat belts
NOTE
NOTE
l For the front passenger seat, the warning funcl
tion works only while a person is sitting on
the seat.
When luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, a sensor in the seat cushion may, depending on the weight and position of the luggage, cause the warning tone to sound and
the warning lamp to come on.
Rear passenger’s seat belt warning lamps*
E00414900021
The rear passenger’s seat belt warning lamps are located on the instrument panel.
l The warning lamps come on even if no one
l
l
is sitting on the rear seat.
If a seat belt is unfastened while the vehicle
is being driven, the tone sounds for approximately 1 second and the warning lamp
comes on for approximately 30 seconds.
If the seat belts are initially fastened but a
seat belt is unfastened while the vehicle is stationary and the vehicle is then driven with
the seat belt still unfastened, the warning
lamp comes on again for approximately 30
seconds.
3
If the electric motor switch is turned to the “ON”
position while a seat belt is not fastened, the warning lamp comes on for approximately 30 seconds
to remind the rear passenger to fasten the seat belt.
If the vehicle is driven with the seat belt still unfastened, the warning lamp comes on for approximately another 30 seconds. (This illumination happens
only the first time the vehicle starts moving with
the seat belt still unfastened.)
The warning lamp goes off when the seat belt is fastened.
3-10
OHAE12E5
Pregnant women restraint
E00405600077
WARNING
l Seat
belts work for everyone, including
pregnant women. Pregnant women
should use the available seat belts. This
will reduce the likelihood of injury to
both the woman and the unborn child.
The lap belt should be worn across the
thighs and as snug against the hips as possible, but not across the waist. Consult
your doctor if you have any additional
questions or concerns.
Seat and seat belts
Seat belt pretensioner system and
force limiter system
E00405700166
The driver’s seat and front passenger’s seat each
have a seat belt equipped with a pretensioner system.
sult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point. It is important to do
so because unexpected activation of the
pretensioner seat belts could cause injuries.
E00405801164
NOTE
l To obtain the best results from your pre-
tensioner seat belt, make sure you have adjusted your seat correctly and wear your
seat belt properly.
When transporting children in your vehicle, some
type of child restraint system should always be
used according to the size of the child. This is required by law in most countries.
The regulations concerning driving with children in
the front seat may differ from country to country.
You are advised to comply with the relevant regulations.
l The pretensioner seat belts will be activated
l
WARNING
E00406401747
l If you need to scrap the vehicle, please con-
Pretensioner system
The pretensioner system will retract its respective
seat belts instantaneously, thus maximizing the seat
belt’s effectiveness, if there is a frontal impact severe enough to injure the driver and/or front passenger and the electric motor switch is in the “ON” or
“START” position.
Child restraint
CAUTION
if the vehicle suffers a severe frontal impact,
even if the seat belts are not worn.
The pretensioner seat belts are designed to
work only once. After the pretensioner seat
belts have been activated, we recommend
you have them replaced by a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
WARNING
l When
l
SRS warning lamp
E00405900315
CAUTION
l Installation
of audio equipment or repairs in the vicinity of the pretensioner
seat belts or floor console must be performed in line with MITSUBISHI
MOTORS guidelines. It is important to
do so because the work could affect the
pretensioner systems.
This warning lamp is shared by the SRS airbags
and the pretensioner seat belts. Refer to “SRS warning lamp” on page 3-29.
l
possible, put children in the rear
seat. Accident statistics indicate that children of all sizes and ages are safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat rather than in the front seat.
Holding a child in your arms is no substitute for a restraint system. Failure to use
a proper restraint system can result in severe or fatal injury to the child.
Each child restraint device or fixing is to
be used only by one child.
Force limiter system
E00406000209
In the event of a collision, each force limiter system will effectively absorb the load applied to the
seat belt to minimize the impact to the passenger.
OHAE12E5
3-11
3
Seat and seat belts
Caution for installing the child restraint on vehicles with a front passenger airbag
E00406500318
Use rearward facing child restraints in the rear seat
or turn off the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF
switch. (Refer to “To turn an airbag off” on page
3-23)
Infants and small children
E00406600999
When transporting infants and small children in
your vehicle, follow the instruction given below.
The label shown here is attached on vehicles with a
front passenger airbag.
Front passenger’s airbag ON
3
WARNING
WARNING
lA
l Extreme Hazard!
Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an airbag in
front of it!
l
3-12
REARWARD FACING CHILD RESTRAINT must NOT be used in the front
passenger seat if the front passenger’s airbag has not been deactivated. The force
of an inflating airbag could kill or cause
serious injuries to the child. A rearward
facing child restraint must only be used
in the rear seat.
A FORWARD FACING CHILD RESTRAINT should be used in the rear seat
whenever possible; if used in the front
seat, turn off the front passenger’s airbag
ON-OFF switch.
OHAE12E5
Instruction:
l For small infants, an infant carrier should be
used. For small children whose height when
seated allows the shoulder belt to lie in contact with the face or the throat, a child seat
should be used.
l The child restraint system should be appropriate for the child’s weight and height and properly fit in the vehicle. For a higher degree of
safety: THE CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SHOULD BE INSTALLED IN THE REAR
SEAT.
Seat and seat belts
NOTE
l Before
purchasing a child restraint system,
try installing it in the rear seat to make sure
there is a good fit. Because of the location of
the seat belt buckles and the shape of the seat
cushion, it may be difficult to securely install
some manufacturer’s child restraint systems.
If the child restraint system can be pulled forward or to either side easily on the seat cushion after the seat belt has been tightened,
choose another manufacturer’s child restraint
system.
WARNING
• To the lower anchorage in the rear seat
ONLY if the child restraint has ISOFIX
mountings (See page 3-18).
• To the seat belt (See page 3-19).
Older children
E00406700277
Children who have outgrown the child restraint system should be seated in the rear seat and wear combination lap shoulder belt.
The lap portion of the belt should be snug and positioned low on the abdomen so that it is below the
top of the hip-bone. Otherwise, the belt could intrude into the child’s abdomen during an accident
and cause injury.
3
l When installing a child restraint system,
l
l
refer to the instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the restraint system. Failure to do so can result in severe or fatal
injury to the child.
After installation, push and pull the child
restraint system back and forth, and side
to side, to see that it is properly secured.
If the child restraint system is not installed securely, it may cause injury to the
child or other occupants in case of an accident or sudden stops.
When the child restraint system is not in
use, keep your child restraint system secured with the seat belt or remove it from
the vehicle in order to prevent it from being thrown around inside the vehicle during an accident.
Depending on the seating position in the vehicle and the child restraint system that you
have, the child restraint can be attached using one of the following two locations:
OHAE12E5
3-13
Seat and seat belts
Suitability for various ISOFIX positions
E00411400373
Mass group
Carrycot
3
0
- Up to 10 kg
(0-9 months)
0+
- Up to 13 kg
(0-2 years)
I
- 9 to 18 kg
(9 months-4 years)
II & III
#1:
Vehicle ISOFIX positions
Size class
Fixture
F
ISO/L1
X
G
ISO/L2
X
E
ISO/R1
X
E
ISO/R1
IL*1, IL*2, #1
D
ISO/R2
X
Rear (Left side/Right side)
C
ISO/R3
X
D
ISO/R2
X
C
ISO/R3
X
B
ISO/F2
IUF
B1
ISO/F2X
IUF, IL*3
A
ISO/F3
IUF
- 15 to 36 kg
(4-12 years)
X
When installing a child restraint system, adjust the front seat in position more than 2 notches forward from the centre of its fore-aft adjustment range.
CAUTION
l When installing a child restraint system, prevent the head restraint from touching the child restraint system by removing it or adjusting its height.
l When installing a child restraint system, prevent the front seats from touching the child restraint system.
If the driver’s seat touches the child restraint system, install the child restraint system in the rear seat of the passenger’s side.
3-14
OHAE12E5
Seat and seat belts
Definition of characters to be inserted in the table above:
l IUF- Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraints systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group.
l IL- Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems given in the following list (MITSUBISHI MOTORS genuine parts).
l X- ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this mass group.
IL (Genuine part information)
#2:
Genuine part No.
ECE No.
*1
MZ314393 (Child restraint system),
MZ314394 (ISOFIX base)
E1-04301146
*2
MZ314509 (Child restraint system)#2,
MZ314394 (ISOFIX base)
E1-04301146
*3
MZ313045
E1-04301133
3
To be available in 2012
NOTE
l MITSUBISHI MOTORS Europe B.V. reserves the right to changes without any prior announcement.
For further information, please contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
OHAE12E5
3-15
Seat and seat belts
Suitability for various seating positions
E00406801028
Seating position
Front passenger
Mass group
3
Activated airbag
Deactivated airbag#3
Rear (Left side/Right side)
0
- Up to 10 kg
(0-9 months)
X
X
X
0+
- Up to 13 kg
(0-2 years)
X
L*1, L*2
U, L*1, L*2
I
-9 to 18 kg
(9 months-4 years)
X
L*3, L*4
U, L*3, L*4
II & III
-15 to 36 kg
(4-12 years)
X
L*5
U, L*5
#3:
With front passenger’s airbag deactivated by means of front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch
CAUTION
l
l
When installing a child restraint system, prevent the head restraint from touching the child restraint system by removing it or adjusting its height.
When installing a child restraint system, prevent the front seats from touching the child restraint system.
If the driver’s seat touches the child restraint system, install the child restraint system in the rear seat of the passenger’s side.
Definition of characters to be inserted in the table above:
l U- Suitable for “universal” category restraints approved for use in this mass group.
l L- Suitable for particular child restraints in the following list (MITSUBISHI MOTORS genuine parts).
l X- Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group.
3-16
OHAE12E5
Seat and seat belts
L (Genuine part information)
#4:
Genuine part No.
ECE No.
*1
MZ314393
E1-04301146
*2
MZ314509#4
E1-04301146
*3
MZ313045
E1-04301133
*4
MZ314451
E1-04301203
*5
MZ314250
E1-04301169
To be available in 2012
NOTE
3
l There is no applicable MITSUBISHI MOTORS Genuine Parts to the Mass Group “0-Up to 10 kg”.
l MITSUBISHI MOTORS Europe B.V. reserves the right to changes without any prior announcement.
For further information, please contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
OHAE12E5
3-17
Seat and seat belts
Installing a child restraint system to
the lower anchorage (ISOFIX child restraint mountings) and tether anchorage*
E00406900817
Tether anchorage locations
There are 2 child restraint anchorage points located
on the luggage compartment floor. These are for securing a child restraint system tether strap to each
of the 2 rear seating positions in your vehicle.
It is not necessary to retain the child restraint system using the vehicle’s seat belts.
Lower anchorage location
Your vehicle’s rear seat is fitted with lower anchorages for attaching a child restraint system with ISOFIX mountings.
TOP TETHER
3
A- Child restraint system connectors
WARNING
l
Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for
adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Child restraint system with ISOFIX mountings
The child restraint system is designed only for
seats that incorporate lower anchorages. Retain the
child restraint system using the lower anchorages.
3-18
OHAE12E5
To install
1. Remove any foreign material in or around
the connectors and ensure the vehicle seat
belt is in its normal storage position.
2. Open the gap a little between the seat cushion (A) and the seatback (B) with your hand
to locate the lower anchorages (C).
3. Push the child restraint system’s connectors
(D) into the lower anchorages (C) in accordance with the instructions provided by the
child restraint system’s manufacturer.
Seat and seat belts
5. Open the tether anchorage cover (E), and
then latch the tether strap hook (F) of the
child restraint system to the tether anchorage
bracket (G) and tighten the top tether strap
hook so it is securely fastened.
Installing a child restraint system to a
3-point type seat belt (with emergency
locking mechanism)*
E00408700675
3-point type seat belt location
The child restraint system can be fitted by using
the 3-point type seat belt at the seating position illustrated below.
ABCD-
Vehicle seat cushion
Vehicle seatback
Lower anchorage
Connector
If your child restraint system requires the use
of a tether strap, fasten the tether strap in accordance with steps 3 through 4.
4. Remove the head restraint from the location
in which you wish to install a child restraint.
3
6. Push and pull the child restraint system in all
directions to be sure it is firmly secured.
To remove
Remove the child restraint system in accordance
with the instructions provided by the child restraint
system’s manufacturer.
OHAE12E5
Installation:
1. Fasten the seat belt to secure the child restraint system.
Make sure you hear a “click” when you insert the latch plate in the buckle.
2. Use the locking clip to completely eliminate
any slackness.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in all directions to be sure it is secure.
3-19
Seat and seat belts
Seat belt inspection
WARNING
l For some types of child restraint, the lock-
ing clip (A) should be used to help avoid
personal injury during a collision or sudden manoeuvre.
It must be fitted and used in accordance
with the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
The locking clip must be removed when
the child restraint is removed.
E00406300576
l Check the belts for cuts, worn or frayed webl
bing and for cracked or deformed metallic
parts. Replace the belt assembly if it is defective.
A dirty belt should be cleaned with neutral detergent in warm water. After rinsing in water,
let it dry in the shade. Do not attempt to
bleach or re-dye the belts because this will affect their characteristics.
WARNING
l
3
l
l
3-20
We recommend you to have all seat belt
assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware inspected after any collision. We recommend that seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and
the belts show no damage and continue to
operate properly.
Do not attempt to repair or replace any
part of the seat belt assemblies; we recommend you to have this work done by a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
Service Point. Incorrect repair or replacement could reduce the effectiveness of the
belts and could result in serious injury in
the event of a collision.
Once the pretensioner has been activated,
it cannot be re-used.
It must be replaced together with the retractor.
OHAE12E5
Supplemental restraint system
(SRS) - airbag
E00407202026
The information for SRS airbags includes important information concerning the driver’s and front
passenger’s airbags, the side airbags and the curtain airbags.
The SRS driver and front passenger airbags are designed to supplement the primary protection of the
driver and front passenger side seat belt systems by
providing those occupants with protection against
head and chest injuries in certain moderate-to-severe frontal collisions.
The SRS side airbags are designed to supplement
properly worn seat belts and provide the driver and
front passenger with protection against chest, abdomen and hip injuries in certain moderate-to-severe
side impact collisions.
The SRS curtain airbags are designed to supplement properly worn seat belts and provide the driver and passenger with protection against head injuries in certain moderate-to-severe side impact collisions.
The SRS is NOT a substitute for the seat belts. To
ensure the maximum protection during all types of
collisions and accidents, all occupants, including
the passengers as well as the driver, must wear
their seat belts.
Seat and seat belts
How the Supplemental Restraint System works
4- Front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch
The SRS includes the following components:
5- Side airbag modules
6- Curtain airbag modules
1- Airbag module (Driver)
2- Airbag module (Passenger)
3- Front passenger’s airbag OFF indication lamp
WARNING
l
E00407301600
The airbags will operate only when the electric motor switch is in the “ON” or “START” position.
The airbags deployment produces a sudden, loud
noise, and releases some smoke and powder, but
these conditions are not injurious, and do not indicate a fire in the vehicle. People with respiratory
problems may feel some temporary irritation from
chemicals used to produce the deployment; open
the windows after airbag deployment, if safe to do
so.
The airbags deflate very rapidly after deployment,
so there is little danger of obscured vision.
l
l
IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO BE PROPERLY SEATED.
A driver or front passenger too close to
the steering wheel or instrument panel
during airbag deployment can be killed
or seriously injured.
Airbags inflate very fast, and with great
force.
If the driver and front passenger are not
properly seated and restrained, the airbags may not protect you properly, and
could cause serious or fatal injuries when
it inflates.
Do not sit on the edge of the seat, or lean
head or chest close to the steering wheel
or instrument panel. Do not put feet or
legs on or against the instrument panel.
Place all infants and small children in the
rear seat and properly restrained using
an appropriate child restraint system.
The rear seat is the safest place for infants and children.
CAUTION
l
Airbags inflate at an extremely rapid
speed. In certain situations, contact with
inflating airbags can result in abrasions,
light cuts, bruises, and the like.
OHAE12E5
3-21
3
Seat and seat belts
WARNING
l
Infants and small children should never
be unrestrained, stand up against the instrument panel or be held in your arms
or on your lap. They could be seriously injured or killed in a collision, including
when the airbag inflates. They should be
properly seated in the rear seat in an appropriate child restraint system. See the
“Child restraint” section of this owner’s
manual.
Use rearward facing child restraints in the rear seat
or turn off the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF
switch. (Refer to “To turn an airbag off” on page
3-23)
Front passenger’s airbag ON
WARNING
l
Older children should be seated in the
rear seat, properly wearing the seat belt,
with an appropriate booster seat if needed.
Caution for installing the child restraint on vehicles with a front passenger airbag
E00408800474
The label shown here is attached on vehicles with a
front passenger airbag.
3
WARNING
lA
l
3-22
REARWARD FACING CHILD RESTRAINT must NOT be used in the front
passenger seat if the front passenger’s airbag has not been deactivated. The force
of an inflating airbag could kill or cause
serious injuries to the child.
A rearward facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat.
A FORWARD FACING CHILD RESTRAINT should be used in the rear seat
whenever possible; if they must be used
in the front passenger seat, turn off the
front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch.
Failure to do so could kill or cause serious injuries to the child.
OHAE12E5
WARNING
l Extreme Hazard!
Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an airbag in
front of it!
Seat and seat belts
Front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF
switch
Front passenger’s airbag OFF indication lamp
E00410100272
E00410200316
The front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch can
be used to disable the front passenger’s airbag. If
you have a child restraint system that cannot be fitted to any seat other than the front passenger seat,
be sure to turn OFF the front passenger’s airbag ONOFF switch before using it. (Refer to “To turn an
airbag off” on page 3-23)
The front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch is located as shown in the illustration.
The front passenger’s airbag OFF indication lamp
is located as shown in the illustration.
WARNING
l
Do not fit any accessory that makes the indication lamp impossible to see, and do
not cover the indication lamp with a sticker. You would not be able to verify the status of the passenger airbag system.
To turn an airbag off
E00412300076
WARNING
l
The indication lamp normally comes on when the
electric motor switch is turned to the “ON” position, and goes off a few seconds later.
When the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch
is turned OFF, the indication lamp will stay on to
show that the front passenger’s airbag is not operational. When the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF
switch is turned ON, the indication lamp goes off
to show that the front passenger’s airbag is operational.
OHAE12E5
To reduce risk of serious or fatal injury:
• Always remove the key from the electric motor switch before operating the
front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF
switch. Failure to do so could adversely affect the airbag performance.
• Wait at least 60 seconds to operate the
front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF
switch after turning the electric motor
switch to the “LOCK” position.
The SRS airbag system is designed to
retain enough voltage to deploy the airbag.
• Always remove the key from the front
passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch after operating that switch. Failure to
do so could lead to improper position
of the front passenger’s airbag ONOFF switch.
• Do not turn OFF the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch except
when a child restraint system is fitted
to the front passenger seat.
3-23
3
Seat and seat belts
WARNING
• Turn ON the front passenger’s airbag
ON-OFF switch immediately after removing a child restraint system from
the front passenger seat.
• If the indication lamp does not come
on when the front passenger’s airbag
ON-OFF switch is turned OFF, do not
fit a child restraint system to the front
passenger seat. We recommend you to
have the system inspected by a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
Service Point.
• If the indication lamp remains on
when the front passenger’s airbag ONOFF switch is turned ON, do not allow anyone to sit on the front passenger seat. We recommend you to have
the
system
inspected
by
a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
Service Point.
3
3. Insert the key into the electric motor switch,
and turn the electric motor switch to the
“ON” position. The front passenger’s airbag
OFF indication lamp will stay on.
The front passenger’s airbag is now deactivated
and will not deploy until switched on again.
Driver’s and front passenger’s airbag
system
E00407400792
To turn an airbag off, follow these steps:
1. Insert the key into the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch, and turn it to the
“OFF” position.
2. Remove the key from the key opening of the
front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch.
3-24
The driver’s airbag is located under the padded cover in the middle of the steering wheel. The front passenger’s airbag is contained in the instrument panel
above the glove box.
OHAE12E5
The driver’s airbag and the front passenger’s airbag are designed to inflate at the same time even if
the passenger seat is not occupied.
Seat and seat belts
Deployment of front airbags
E00407501660
The front airbags ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY
when…
The front airbags are designed to deploy when the
vehicle suffers a moderate to severe frontal impact.
A typical condition is shown in the illustration.
1- Head-on collision with a solid wall at a
speed of approximately 25 km/h (16 mph) or
higher
2- Moderate-to-severe frontal impact within the
shaded area between the arrows
Because frontal collisions can easily move you out
of position, it is important to always properly wear
your seat belts. Your seat belts will help keep you a
safe distance from the steering wheel and instrument panel during the initial stages of airbag deployment. The initial stage of airbag inflation is the
most forceful one, and can possibly cause serious
or fatal injuries. Moreover, the seat belts in your vehicle are your primary means of protection in a collision. The airbags are designed to provide additional protection. Therefore, for your safety and the safety of all occupants, be sure to always properly wear
your seat belts.
The front airbags MAY NOT DEPLOY when…
With certain types of frontal collisions, the vehicle’s body structure is designed to absorb the shock
to help protect the occupants from harm. (The vehicle body’s front area may deform significantly as it
absorbs the impact.) Under such circumstances, the
front airbags may not deploy irrespective of the deformation and damage to the vehicle body.
Examples of some typical conditions are shown in
the illustration.
1- Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow objects.
2- Vehicle slides under the rear body of a truck
3- Oblique frontal impacts
Because the front airbags do not protect the occupant in all types of frontal collisions, be sure to always properly wear your seat belts.
The front airbags will deploy if the severity of the
impact is above the designed threshold level, comparable to an approximately 25 km/h (16 mph) collision when impacting straight into a solid wall that
does not move or deform. If the severity of the impact is below the above threshold level, the front airbags may not deploy. However, this threshold
speed will be considerably higher if the vehicle
strikes an object that absorbs the impact by either
deforming or moving (for example, another stationary vehicle, pole or a guard rail).
OHAE12E5
3-25
3
Seat and seat belts
The front airbags ARE NOT DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when…
The front airbags are not designed to deploy in conditions where they cannot typically provide protection to the occupant. Such conditions are shown in
the illustration.
Examples of some typical conditions are shown in
the illustration.
WARNING
l
l
3
1- Rear end collisions
2- Side collisions
3- Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof
Because the front airbags do not protect the occupant in all types of collisions, be sure to always properly wear your seat belts.
The front airbags MAY DEPLOY when…
The front airbags may deploy if the bottom of the
vehicle suffers a moderate-to-severe impact (undercarriage damage).
3-26
Do not attach anything to the steering
wheel’s padded cover, such as badges or
accessories. It might strike and injure an
occupant if the airbag inflates.
Do not set anything on, or attach anything to, the instrument panel above the
glove box. It might strike and injure an occupant if the airbag inflates.
1- Collision with an elevated median/island or
kerb
2- Vehicle travels over a deep hole/pothole
3- Vehicle drives down a steep slope and hits
the ground
Because the front airbags may deploy in certain
types of unexpected impacts as shown in the illustration that can easily move you out of position, it
is important to always properly wear your seat
belts. Your seat belts will help keep you a safe distance from the steering wheel and instrument panel
during the initial stages of airbag deployment. The
initial stage of airbag inflation is the most forceful
one and can possibly cause serious or fatal injuries
if you contact it at this stage.
WARNING
l Do not attach accessories to, or put them
l
OHAE12E5
in front of, the windscreen. These objects
could restrict the airbag inflation, or
strike and injure an occupant if the airbags inflate.
Do not put packages, pets or other objects between the airbags and the driver
or front passenger. It could affect airbag
performance, or could cause injury when
the airbag inflates.
Seat and seat belts
The label shown here is attached to the seatbacks
with a side airbag.
WARNING
l Right
l
after the airbag inflation, several
airbag system components will be hot. Do
not touch these components. There is a
danger of being burnt.
The airbag system is designed to work only once. Once the airbags have deployed,
they will not work again. They must
promptly be replaced, and we recommend you to have the entire airbag system inspected by a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
Side airbag system
E00407600518
The side airbags (A) are contained in the driver and
front passenger seatbacks.
The side airbag is designed to inflate only on the
side of the vehicle that is impacted, even with no
passenger in the front seat.
Deployment of side airbags and curtain airbags
E00407701457
The side airbags and curtain airbags ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when…
The side airbags and curtain airbags are designed
to deploy when the vehicle suffers a moderate-tosevere side impact to the middle of the passenger
compartment.
The typical condition is shown in the illustration.
3
Curtain airbag system
E00409100562
The curtain airbags are contained in the front pillars and roof side rail. The curtain airbag is designed to inflate only on the side of the vehicle that
is impacted, even with no passenger in the front
seat or rear seat.
The seat belts in your vehicle are your primary
means of protection in a collision. The side airbags
and curtain airbags are designed to provide additional protection. Therefore, for your safety and the safety of all occupants, be sure to always properly wear
your seat belts.
OHAE12E5
3-27
Seat and seat belts
The side airbags and curtain airbags MAY NOT
DEPLOY when…
With certain types of side collisions, the vehicle’s
body structure is designed to absorb the shock to
help protect the occupants from harm. (The vehicle
body’s side area may deform significantly as it absorbs the impact.) Under such circumstances, the
side airbags and curtain airbags may not deploy irrespective of the deformation and damage to the vehicle body. Examples of some typical conditions
are shown in the illustration.
3
3- Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow object
The side airbags and curtain airbags ARE NOT
DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when…
The side airbags and curtain airbags are not designed to deploy in conditions where they cannot
usually provide protection to the occupant. Typical
conditions are shown in the illustration.
4- Oblique side impacts
5- Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof
Because the side airbags and curtain airbags do not
protect the occupant in all types of side collisions,
be sure to always properly wear your seat belts.
1- Head-on collisions
2- Rear end collisions
Because the side airbags and curtain airbags do not
protect the occupant in all types of collisions, be
sure to always properly wear your seat belts.
1- Side impacts in an area away from the passenger compartment
2- Motorcycle or other similar small vehicle collides with the side of vehicle
WARNING
l The side airbags and curtain airbags are
designed to supplement the driver and passenger seat belts in certain side impacts.
Seat belts should always be worn properly, and the driver and passenger should
sit well back and upright without leaning
against the window or door.
3-28
OHAE12E5
Seat and seat belts
WARNING
l
The side airbags and curtain airbags inflate with great force. The driver and passenger should not put their arms out the
window, and should not lean against the
door, in order to reduce risk of serious or
possible fatal injury from the deploying
side airbags and curtain airbags.
WARNING
l
l
l
Do not place stickers, labels or additional
trim on the seatback of either front seat.
They could interfere with proper side airbag inflation.
Do not install seat covers on seats with
side airbags.
Do not re-cover seats that have side airbags. This could interfere with proper
side airbag inflation.
Do not attach a microphone (A) or any
other device or object around the part
where the curtain airbags (B) activate
such as on the windscreen, side door
glass, front and rear pillars and roof side
or assist grips. When the curtain airbags
inflate, the microphone or other device or
object will be hurled with great force or
the curtain airbags may not activate correctly, resulting in death or serious injury.
WARNING
l
l
l
WARNING
l Do
l
not allow any rear seat occupant to
hold onto the seatback of either front
seat, in order to reduce risk of injury
from the deploying side airbags. Special
care should be taken with children.
Do not place any objects near or in front
of the seatback of either front seat. They
could interfere with proper side airbag inflation, and also could cause injury if
thrown free by side airbag deployment.
Never install a rearward facing child restraint in the front passenger seat. A forward facing child restraint should be
used in the rear seat whenever possible. If
a forward facing child restraint must be
used in the front passenger seat, adjust
the seat to the most rearward position,
and ensure that the child stays in the
child restraint and away from the door.
Do not allow the child to lean against or
close to the door even if the child is seated
in a child restraint system.
The child’s head should also not be
leaned against or be close to the area
where the side airbags and curtain airbags are located. It is dangerous if the
side airbags and curtain airbags inflate.
Failure to follow all of these instructions
could lead to serious or fatal injury to the
child.
We recommend work around and on the
side airbags and curtain airbags system
to be done by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Authorized Service Point.
SRS warning lamp
E00407801591
There is a Supplemental Restraint System (“SRS”)
warning lamp on the instrument panel. The system
checks itself and the lamp tells you if there is a problem. When the electric motor switch is turned to
the “ON” or “START” position, the warning lamp
should illuminate for several seconds and then
should go out. This means the system is ready.
OHAE12E5
3-29
3
Seat and seat belts
If an SRS airbag or pretensioner seat belt is not operating properly, the warning lamp comes on and
stays on.
The SRS warning lamp is shared by the SRS airbag
and the seat belt pretensioner system.
SRS servicing
NOTE
E00407901550
WARNING
l We
l
3
WARNING
l
3-30
If any of the following conditions occur,
the SRS and/or seat belt pretensioners
are not working properly, and we recommend you to have it inspected by a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
Service Point immediately.
• The SRS warning lamp does not illuminate when the electric motor switch
is turned “ON”.
• The SRS warning lamp does not go
out after several seconds.
• The SRS warning lamp illuminates
while driving.
l When you transfer ownership of the vehicle
l
l
recommend any maintenance performed on or near the components of the
SRS to be performed by a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
Improper work on the SRS components
or wiring could result in inadvertent deployment of the airbags, or could render
the SRS inoperative; either situation
could result in serious injury.
Do not modify your steering wheel, seat
belt retractor or any other SRS components. For example, replacement of the
steering wheel, or modifications to the
front bumper or body structure can adversely affect SRS performance and lead
to possible injury.
If your vehicle has sustained any damage,
we recommend you to have the SRS inspected to ensure it is in proper working
order.
Do not modify your front seats, centre pillar and centre console.
It can adversely affect SRS performance
and lead to possible injury.
If you found any tear, scratch, crack or
damage to the seat fabric near the side airbag, the portion of the front and rear pillars and roof side rail, you should have
the SRS inspected by a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
OHAE12E5
l
to some other person, we urge you to alert
the new owner that it is equipped with the
SRS and refer the new owner to the applicable section in this owner’s manual.
If your vehicle has to be scrapped, do this in
line with local legislation and contact a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
Point to safely dismantle the airbag system.
Instruments and controls
Instruments...................................................................................4-02
Indication and warning lamps.......................................................4-08
Indication lamps...........................................................................4-09
Warning lamps..............................................................................4-09
Combination headlamps and dipper switch..................................4-11
Headlamp levelling switch...........................................................4-13
Turn-signal lever...........................................................................4-14
Hazard warning flasher switch.....................................................4-15
Fog lamp switch............................................................................4-15
Wiper and washer switch..............................................................4-16
Rear window demister switch.......................................................4-18
Horn switch...................................................................................4-19
4
OHAE12E5
Instruments and controls
Instruments
Speedometer
E00500101251
E00500201050
When the electric motor switch is in the “ON” position, the speedometer indicates the vehicle speed in
kilometers per hour (km/h) (Type 1) or miles per
hour (MPH) (Type 2).
Type 1
4
1- Energy level gauge
2- Energy usage indicator
3- Odometer/Tripmeter/Meter illumination control/Service reminder/Cruising range indicator
4- Speedometer (km/h or MPH)
5- Reset button/Daytime dipper button/Selector
button
2. Keep the reset button pressed for two seconds or longer to change the display unit
from MPH to km/h or from km/h to MPH.
Type 2
NOTE
l Once
NOTE
l The display setting can be changed to the preferred units (km or miles) (Type 2).
Refer to “Changing the display unit*” on
page 4-02.
the display unit has changed, keeping
the reset button pressed will not cause the display unit to change again.
The display unit for the cruising range will change
to match the selected speedometer display unit.
Speedometer
Cruising range
MPH
Miles
km/h
km
Changing the display unit*
E00529500026
It is possible to select the speedometer’s display unit.
1. Press the reset button (A) to display the odometer (B).
(Refer to “To change the display” on page
4-03.)
4-02
OHAE12E5
NOTE
l Even if speedometer display unit is changed,
the display units for the odometer, tripmeter,
and service reminder do not change.
Instruments and controls
Energy usage indicator
E00529600014
The consumption power of the electric motor unit
and the air conditioning, and charged power of electric energy generated from the regenerative brake
are indicated.
When the ready indicator illuminates, the indicating needle moves to the standard position (A) and
moves to the left or right according to the use conditions of the vehicle.
Odometer/Tripmeter/Meter illumination control/Service reminder/Cruising range indicator
E00500601214
To change the display
E00530700015
The display is changed every time the reset button
(A) is pressed lightly (less than 1 second).
With the electric motor switch in the “ON” position, the odometer, tripmeter, meter illumination
control, service reminder and cruising range indicator are displayed.
[When the indicating needle moves to the right of
the standard position]
Indicates consumption power of the electric motor
unit and the air conditioning.
The more the needle moves to the right, the more
electrical power is being consumed.
[When the indicating needle moves to the left of
the standard position]
Indicates charged power of electric energy generated from regenerative braking.
The more the needle moves to the left, the more
electric energy is charged.
4
12345-
Odometer
Tripmeter
Tripmeter
Meter illumination control
Service reminder (Drive distance remaining
until next inspection)
6- Service reminder (Number of months remaining until next inspection)
7- Cruising range indicator
NOTE
l The
cruising range indicator is indicated
when the electric motor switch is in the
“ON” position.
OHAE12E5
4-03
Instruments and controls
l If there is no operation for about 10 seconds
when the meter illumination control or service reminder is shown, the display returns to
the odometer.
Odometer
E00530800016
The odometer indicates the total distance the vehicle has travelled.
NOTE
NOTE
l If the auxiliary battery terminal is removed,
and
the memories for the tripmeter
displays are erased and the displays return to
0.
Service reminder
l Even if the electric motor switch is turned to
the “ACC” or “LOCK” position, the service
reminder will be displayed for about 30 seconds after the reset button is pressed.
Driving distance
E00517700164
NOTE
l Even if the electric motor switch is turned to
Number of months
“ACC” or “LOCK”, the odometer will be displayed for about 30 seconds after the reset button is pressed.
Tripmeter
4
E00530900017
The tripmeter indicates the distance travelled during a particular trip or period.
There are two tripmeter displays: Tripmeter
and
.
Tripmeter
can be used to measure the distance
travelled since the current trip began. At the same
time, Tripmeter
can be used to measure the distance from an intermediate location.
NOTE
l Even if the electric motor switch is turned to
the “ACC” or “LOCK” position, the tripmeter will be displayed for about 30 seconds after the reset button is pressed.
The service reminder shows the driving distance
(1) or number of months (2) remaining until the
next 12-monthly (20,000 km / 12,500 miles) inspection.
When the next inspection is nearly due, the display
shows “-----”.
At this time, a spanner mark (3) is shown for a few
seconds whenever the electric motor switch is
turned from the “LOCK” position or the “ACC” position to the “ON” position.
To reset the tripmeter
To return the display to “0”, press the reset button
(A) for more than 2 seconds. Only the currently displayed value will be reset.
4-04
OHAE12E5
1. The display shows the driving distance or
number of months remaining until the next inspection.
2. When the next inspection is nearly due, the
display shows “-----”.
For further information, we recommend you
to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
At this time, a spanner mark is shown for a
few seconds whenever the electric motor
Instruments and controls
switch is turned from the “LOCK” position
or the “ACC” position to the “ON” position.
When they have been reset, the driving distance or
number of months remaining until the next inspection are shown and the spanner mark (A) is no longer shown every time the electric motor switch is
turned from the “LOCK” position or the “ACC” position to the “ON” position.
4. The driving distance or number of months remaining until the next inspection will be
shown.
CAUTION
l
Daily and periodic inspections and maintenance are your responsibility. Be sure
to perform them to help prevent accidents and breakdowns.
NOTE
l It is not possible to reset the “------” indica3. When the vehicle is inspected at a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
Point, the driving distance or number of
months remaining until the next inspection
will be shown.
l
NOTE
l
l The
l
indicated distance decreases in steps of
100 km (62 miles). The indicated number of
months decreases in steps of one month.
It is possible to change the settings for the
service reminder.
For further information, we recommend you
to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
Resetting the service reminder
With the electric motor switch in the “LOCK” position or the “ACC” position, it is possible to reset
the spanner mark (A) and “------” indication (B).
1. Push the reset button (D) to view the driving
distance or number of months remaining until the next inspection.
2. Give the reset button (D) a long push (at
least two seconds) to make the spanner mark
(A) start flashing. (If you do not touch the reset button for 10 seconds while the spanner
mark is flashing, the display will revert to its
original indication.)
3. Give the reset button (D) a gentle push while
the spanner mark is flashing. The “------” indication (B) will change to “cLEAr” (C).
OHAE12E5
tion (B) with the electric motor switch in the
“ON” position.
When a certain distance has been driven and
a certain period has elapsed after appearance
of the “------” indication (B), the indication is
automatically reset and the number of
months until the next periodic inspection is
shown.
If you accidentally reset the display, consult
a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
4-05
4
Instruments and controls
Daytime dipper button (meter illumination control)
E00529700028
l If
you press and hold the button for longer
than about 1 second, the brightness automatically scrolls through its different levels, and
stops scrolling when you release the button.
Select your desired level of brightness.
Each time you press the daytime dipper button (2),
the brightness of the instruments changes.
Bright
Dim
Energy level gauge
E00530000018
The energy level gauge indicates the remaining power in the traction battery during charging or when
the electric motor switch is in the “ON” position.
Cruising range indicator
E00529900020
This displays the approximate cruising range (how
many more kilometres or miles you can drive).
When the cruising range becomes short, the indication changes to “---”.
NOTE
l The cruising range is displayed based on the
4
1- Brightness display
2- Daytime dipper button
NOTE
l You can adjust to 4 different levels for when
l
l
4-06
the tail lamps are illuminated and 4 for when
they are not.
When the lamp switch is in the “AUTO” position, the meter illumination switches automatically to the adjusted brightness, depending on the brightness outside the vehicle.
The brightness level of the instruments is stored when the electric motor switch is turned off.
l
l
past drive data. It may vary depending on the
driving condition (road condition, driving situation, etc.) and air conditioning operation
status.
For example, the cruising range can be shortened by driving on congested roads, by driving uphill, by repeated hard acceleration, and
by use of the air conditioner and heater.
When the auxiliary battery terminal is disconnected, the power consumption data of the
traction battery in the past is deleted. A different value from before may be displayed.
Be sure to use the display only for reference.
When the traction battery is charged, the cruising range is updated. If the charge level is
low, the correct value is not displayed.
On vehicles with speedometer of Type 2, the
display setting can be changed to the preferred units (km or miles).
Refer to “Changing the display unit*” on
page 4-02.
OHAE12E5
F- Battery is fully powered.
E- Charge the battery.
NOTE
l The charging indicator is also illuminated during charging. Refer to “Charging indicator”
on page 4-09.
Instruments and controls
Low energy warning indicator
E00530300011
l If the energy level gauge shows 2 bars while
the traction battery is being charged, the warning indicator flashes. If the energy level
gauge shows 1 bar while the traction battery
is being charged, the warning indicator and
the graduation flash alternately.
When the electric motor switch is in the “ON” position and the remaining bar of the energy level
gauge shows 2 bars or less, the warning indicator
(A) and the graduation (B) flash as follows:
4
When the energy level gauge shows 2 bars: The
warning indicator flashes.
When the energy level gauge shows 1 bar: The warning indicator and the graduation flash alternately.
Recharge the traction battery as soon as possible.
NOTE
l If the energy level gauge shows 0 bars durl
ing use of the air conditioning (cooling or
heating), the air conditioning stops operation
and the mode is changed to fan only.
If the energy level gauge shows 0 bars, the
power down warning lamp is illuminated to
control the output.
OHAE12E5
4-07
Instruments and controls
Indication and warning lamps
E00501502220
Type 2
Type 1
4
12.
34567891011-
4-08
Low energy warning indicator ® p. 4-07
Selector lever position indicator ® p. 5-10
High-beam indication lamp ® p. 4-09
Turn-signal indication lamps/Hazard warning indication lamps ® p. 4-09
Position lamp indication lamp ® p. 4-09
Front fog lamp indication lamp* ® p. 4-09
Service reminder ® p. 4-04
Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt warning lamp ® p. 3-09
Supplement Restraint System (SRS) warning lamp ® p. 3-29
Rear fog lamp indication lamp ® p. 4-09
Ready indicator ® p. 4-09
1213141516171819202122-
Auxiliary battery charge warning lamp ® p. 4-10
Electric power steering system (EPS) warning lamp ® p. 5-17
Electric motor unit warning lamp ® p. 4-11
Brake warning lamp ® p. 4-09
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning lamp ® p. 5-16
Power down warning lamp ® p. 4-11
Active stability control (ASC) indication lamp ® p. 5-19
Active stability control (ASC) OFF indication lamp ® p. 5-19
Charging indicator ® p. 4-09
Door ajar warning lamp ® p. 4-10
Rear passenger’s seat belt warning lamps* ® p. 3-10
OHAE12E5
Instruments and controls
Indication lamps
Position lamp indication lamp
E00501600012
Turn-signal indication lamps/
Hazard warning indication
lamps
E00501700374
These indication lamps blink on and off
when a turn-signal lamp is operating.
NOTE
l If
the blinking is too fast, the
cause may be a blown lamp bulb
or a faulty turn-signal connection.
When the hazard warning lamp switch is
pressed, all turn-signal lamps will flash
on and off continuously.
E00508900102
This lamp illuminates with the lamp
switch at “
” or “ ” position
E00530100019
This indicator illuminates when the electric motor switch is turned to “START”
and driving becomes possible.
Charging indicator
E00530200010
This indicator flashes when the regular
charging cable or quick charging cable
is connected.
After that, the lamp switches to being illuminated when charging starts and goes
out when charging is completed.
E00501800072
This indication lamp illuminates when
the high-beam is used.
E00502400017
Brake warning lamp (brake
warning buzzer)
E00502502490
Ready indicator
High-beam indication lamp
Warning lamps
This lamp illuminates when the electric
motor switch is turned to the “ON” position, and goes off after a few seconds.
Always make sure that the lamp goes off
before driving.
With the electric motor switch in the
“ON” position, the brake warning lamp
illuminates under the following conditions:
l When the parking brake lever has
been engaged.
l When the brake fluid level in the
reservoir falls to a low level.
l When there is a fault in the brake
vacuum pressure system.
l When the brake force distribution
function is not operating correctly.
Brake warning buzzer
When the brake vacuum pressure is insufficient, a buzzer will sound to alert
the driver that braking performance may
decrease. If this buzzer should continue
to sound, park your vehicle in a safe
place and we recommend you to have it
checked.
Front fog lamp indication
lamp*
E00501900132
This indication lamp illuminates while
the front fog lamps are on.
Rear fog lamp indication lamp
E00502000084
This indication lamp illuminates while
the rear fog lamp is on.
OHAE12E5
4-09
4
Instruments and controls
NOTE
l Depressing the brake pedal repeat-
edly may turn on the brake warning lamp and brake warning buzzer. It is normal if the lamp goes
out and the buzzer stops sounding
after a few seconds.
CAUTION
l In
the situations listed below,
brake performance may be compromised or the vehicle may become unstable if brakes are applied suddenly; consequently,
avoid driving at high speeds or
applying the brakes suddenly.
Furthermore,
the
vehicle
should be brought to a stop in a
safe location and to have it
checked.
• The brake warning lamp
does not illuminate when
the parking brake is applied
or does not turn off when
the parking brake is released.
• The brake warning lamp remains illuminated during
driving.
• The brake warning lamp
and ABS warning lamp are
both illuminated at the
same time. Refer to “ABS
warning lamp” on page
5-16.
• The brake warning buzzer
will not stop sounding.
4
4-10
CAUTION
l The
vehicle should be brought
to a halt in the following manner when brake performance
has deteriorated.
• Depress the brake pedal
harder than usual.
Even if the brake pedal
moves down to the very end
of its possible stroke, keep it
pressed down hard.
• Should the brakes fail, use
regenerative braking to reduce your speed and carefully pull the parking brake lever.
Depress the brake pedal to
operate the stop lamp to
alert the vehicles behind you.
Auxiliary battery charge warning lamp
E00502701219
This warning lamp will illuminate when
there is a fault with the charging system
of the auxiliary battery.
Normally, when the electric motor
switch is turned to the “ON” position,
this warning lamp will illuminate. When
the electric motor unit is started, the
lamp goes out.
CAUTION
l
If it illuminates while the ready
indicator is illuminated, there is
a problem in the charging system. In this case, immediately
park your vehicle in a safe
place and we recommend you
to have it checked.
NOTE
l Operation sounds of the brake elec-
tric vacuum pump may be heard
from the electric motor unit room
just after the electric motor switch
has been turned “ON” or when the
brake pedal is depressed.
This occurs when the brake electric vacuum pump is operating normally and does not indicate faulty
operation.
OHAE12E5
Door ajar warning lamp
E00503300840
This lamp illuminates when either of the
doors (also, the tailgate) is not completely closed.
If the vehicle speed exceeds about
8 km/h (5 mph) with a door ajar, the warning lamp will flash 16 times and, at the
same time, the buzzer will sound 16
times to notify the driver that a door is
ajar.
Instruments and controls
Power down warning lamp
CAUTION
E00530500026
l Before
moving your vehicle,
check that the warning lamp is
OFF.
NOTE
l The flashing of the warning lamp
l
and the buzzer can be disabled.
For further information, we recommend
you
to
consult
a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
When the driver’s door is open,
the door ajar warning buzzer does
not sound because the electric motor reminder or selector lever reminder sounds.
Electric motor unit warning
lamp
E00530400012
This warning lamp will illuminate when
there is a fault at the high voltage area.
Refer to “Service precautions” on page
8-06.
This warning lamp illuminates at the following cases, and activation of the safety mechanism will limit output.
l When the energy level gauge
shows 0 bars
l When the traction battery capacity
is not sufficient, the voltage is low
or the temperature of the motor
(electric motor unit) or traction battery is high or low
NOTE
l When
l
l
the power down warning
lamp illuminates, avoid sudden acceleration and sudden starting.
When the remaining power in the
traction battery is low, recharge
the traction battery as soon as possible.
Illumination of the power down
warning lamp does not indicate a
malfunction.
If the power down warning light illuminates during use of the air conditioning (cooling or heating), the
air conditioning may stop operation and the mode is changed to
fan only.
Combination headlamps and
dipper switch
E00506002099
Headlamps
NOTE
l Do
l
not leave the lamps on for a long time
while the ready indicator is not illuminated.
A run-down auxiliary battery could result.
When it rains, or when the vehicle has been
washed, the inside of the lens sometimes becomes foggy, but this does not indicate a functional problem.
When the lamp is switched on, the heat will
remove the fog. However, if water gathers inside the lamp, we recommend you to have it
checked.
Rotate the switch to turn on the lamps.
CAUTION
l
If the lamp illuminates while
driving, immediately park your
vehicle in a safe place and we
recommend you to have it
checked.
OHAE12E5
4-11
4
Instruments and controls
OFF
AUTO
NOTE
All lamps off
l The lamp auto-cutout will not function when
With the electric motor switch
in the “ON” position, headlamps, position, tail, licence
plate, and instrument panel
lamps turn on and off automatically in accordance with outside
light level. All lamps turn off automatically when the electric
motor switch is turned to the
“OFF” position.
Position, tail, licence plate and
instrument panel lamps on
” position.
the lamp switch is in the “
the key has been turned to either the
“LOCK” or “ACC” position or removed
from the electric motor switch with the lamp
switch in the “ ” position, and the lamp
switch is returned to the “OFF” position within approximately 3 minutes, the auto-cutout
function will not be activated.
l When
l If
the lamps do not turn on or off with the
switch in the “AUTO” position, manually operate the switch and we recommend you to
have your vehicle checked.
Headlamps and other lamps go
on
4
NOTE
l The
l
l
4-12
sensitivity of the automatic on/off control can be adjusted. For further information,
please contact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Authorized Service Point.
When the headlamps are turned off by the automatic on/off control with the electric motor
switch in the “ON” position, the front fog
lamps (if so equipped) and rear fog lamps also go off. When the headlamps are subsequently turned back on by the automatic on/
off control, the front fog lamps also come on
but the rear fog lamp stays off. If you wish to
turn the rear fog lamp back on, operate the
switch again.
Do not place anything on the automatic light
sensor (A), and do not clean with a glass cleaner.
Lamps (headlamps, fog lamp, etc.) auto-cutout function
E00532700396
l If
l
the key is turned to the “LOCK” or
“ACC” position or removed from the electric
motor switch, and without opening the driver’s door for 3 minutes while the lamp
switch in the “ ” position, the lamps will
turn off automatically.
If the key is turned to the “LOCK” or
“ACC” position or removed from the electric
motor switch and the driver’s door is opened
within 3 minutes while the lamp switch is in
the “ ” position, a buzzer will sound to
warn the driver that the lamps have not been
turned off, and these lamps will automatically turn off.
OHAE12E5
When you want to keep the lamps on
1. Turn the lamp switch in the “OFF” position
while the key is in the “LOCK” position.
2. Turn on the lamps with the switch in the
“
” or “ ” position again, then the
lamps will remain on.
NOTE
l It is possible to disable the lamp auto-cutout
function. For further information, we recommend you to consult MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
Lamp monitor buzzer
E00506100605
If the driver’s door is opened when the key is in the
“LOCK” or “ACC” position or removed from the
electric motor switch while the lamps are on, a buzzer will sound to remind the driver to turn off the
lamps.
When the lamp auto-cutout function acts, the buzzer will stop automatically.
Instruments and controls
l If you turn the lamps off with the headlamps
Daytime running lamp*
E00530600014
The daytime running lamps come on when the
ready indicator illuminates and the lamp switch is
in the “OFF” or “AUTO” position and the tail
lamps are off.
set to high-beam, the headlamps are automatically returned to their low-beam setting
when the lamp switch is next turned to the
“ ” position.
Dipper (High/Low beam change)
E00506200329
When the lamp switch is in the “ ” position, the
beam changes from high to low (or low to high)
each time the lever is pulled fully (1). While the highbeam is on, the high-beam indication lamp in the instrument cluster will also illuminate.
Headlamp levelling switch
E00506400839
The angle of the headlamp beam varies depending
on the load carried by the vehicle.
The headlamp levelling switch can be used to adjust the headlamp illumination distance (when the
lower beam is illuminated) so that the headlamps’
glare does not distract other drivers.
Set the switch according to the following table.
4
Headlamp flasher
CAUTION
E00506300199
The high-beams flash when the lever is pulled slightly (2), and will go off when it is released.
When the high-beam is on, the high-beam indication lamp in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
l Always perform adjustments before driving.
Do not attempt to adjust while driving, as
it could cause an accident.
NOTE
l The
high-beams can also flash when the
lamp switch is OFF.
OHAE12E5
4-13
Instruments and controls
NOTE
Turn-signal lever
:Full luggage loading
l When
adjusting the beam position, first put
the dial in the “0” position (the highest beam
position).
E00506501459
Switch position 0- Driver only
Switch position 1- Driver + Full luggage loading
Except for vehicles with only the front
seats
Vehicle
condition
Switch
position
4
“0”
“0”
“1”
“1”
“2”
1- Turn-signals
When making a normal turn, use position
(1). The lever will return automatically when
cornering is completed.
2- Lane-change signals
When moving the lever to (2) slightly to
change a lane, the turn-signal lamps and indication lamp in the instrument cluster will only flash while the lever is operated.
Also, when you move the lever to (2) slightly then release it, the turn-signal lamps and indication lamp in the instrument cluster will
flash 3 times.
•: 1 person
:Full luggage loading
Switch position 0- Driver only/Driver + 1 front
passenger
Switch position 1- 4 passengers (including driver)/
4 passengers (including driver) + Full luggage loading
Switch position 2- Driver + Full luggage loading
NOTE
Vehicles with only the front seats
l If
Vehicle condition
l
Switch position
“0”
“1”
•: 1 person
4-14
OHAE12E5
the lamp flashes unusually quickly, the
bulb in a turn-signal lamp may have burned
out. We recommend you to have the vehicle
inspected.
It is possible to activate the following functions. For further information, we recommend you to consult a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
Instruments and controls
• Flashing of the turn-signal lamps when
the lever is operated with the electric motor switch in the “ACC” position
• The turn-signal lamps 3-flash function
for lane changes can be deactivated.
• The time required to operate the lever for
the 3-flash function can be adjusted.
Fog lamp switch
Hazard warning flasher switch
E00506700034
E00506600958
Use the hazard warning flasher switch when the vehicle has to be parked on the road for any emergency.
The hazard warning flashers can always be operated, regardless of the position of the electric motor
switch.
Push the switch to turn on the hazard warning flashers, all turn-signal lamps flash continuously. To
turn them off, push the switch again.
Front fog lamp switch*
E00508300685
The front fog lamps can be operated while the headlamps or tail lamps are on. Turn the knob in the
“ON” direction to turn on the front fog lamps. An
indication lamp in the instrument cluster will also
come on. Turn the knob in the “OFF” direction to
turn off the front fog lamps. The knob will automatically return to its original position when you release it.
4
NOTE
l If the switch is used for a long period while
the ready indicator is not illuminated, the auxiliary battery could go flat and it could be impossible to start the electric motor unit.
NOTE
l The front fog lamps are automatically turned
l
OHAE12E5
off when the headlamps or tail lamps are
turned off. To turn the front fog lamps on
again, turn the knob in the “ON” direction after turning on the headlamps or tail lamps.
Do not use fog lamps except in conditions of
fog, otherwise excessive lamp glare may temporarily blind oncoming vehicle drivers.
4-15
Instruments and controls
Rear fog lamp switch
The rear fog lamp can be operated when the headlamps or front fog lamps (if so equipped) turn on.
An indication lamp in the instrument cluster comes
on when the rear fog lamp is turned on.
[Vehicle without front fog lamps]
Turn the knob once in the “ON” direction to turn
on the rear fog lamp. To turn the rear fog lamp off,
turn the knob once in the “OFF” direction. The
knob will automatically return to its original position when you release it.
4
l The rear fog lamp is automatically turned off
l
l
when the headlamps or front fog lamps (if so
equipped) are turned off.
To turn the rear fog lamp on again, turn the
knob once in the “ON” direction after turning on the headlamps. (Vehicle without front
fog lamps)
To turn the rear fog lamp on again, turn the
knob twice in the “ON” direction after turning on the headlamps. (Vehicle with front
fog lamps)
E00507101667
CAUTION
l
If the washer is used in cold weather, the
washer fluid sprayed against the glass
may freeze, which may hinder visibility.
Warm the glass with the defroster or rear
window demister before using the washer.
Windscreen wipers
E00516900534
[Vehicle with front fog lamps]
Turn the knob once in the “ON” direction to turn
on the front fog lamps. Turn the knob once more in
the “ON” direction to turn on the rear fog lamp. To
turn the rear fog lamp off, turn the knob once in the
“OFF” direction. Turn the knob once more in the
“OFF” direction to turn off the front fog lamps.
The knob will automatically return to its original position when you release it.
4-16
Wiper and washer switch
NOTE
E00508400569
The windscreen wipers can be operated with the
electric motor switch in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
If the blades are frozen to the windscreen or rear
window, do not operate the wipers until the ice has
melted and the blades are freed, otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.
OHAE12E5
Instruments and controls
MIST- Misting function
The wipers will operate once.
OFF-
Off
INT-
Intermittent (Speed sensitive)
LO-
Slow
HI-
Fast
Misting function
The wipers will operate once if the wiper lever is
raised to the “MIST” position and released. This operation is useful when it is drizzling, etc. The wipers will continue to operate while the lever is held
in the “MIST” position.
CAUTION
l If the washer is used in cold weather, the
washer fluid sprayed against the glass
may freeze resulting in poor visibility.
Heat the glass with the defroster or demister before using the washer.
Rear window wiper and washer
To adjust intermittent intervals
With the lever in the “INT” (speed-sensitive) position, the intermittent intervals can be adjusted by
turning the knob (A).
E00507301223
The rear window wiper and washer switch can be
operated with the electric motor switch in the
“ON” or “ACC” position.
4
Windscreen washer
E00507201147
The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the windscreen by pulling the lever towards you. The wipers operate automatically several times while the
washer fluid is being sprayed.
1- Fast
2- Slow
NOTE
l The speed-sensitive-operation function of the
windscreen wipers can be deactivated.
For further information, we recommend you
to consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
OHAE12E5
4-17
Instruments and controls
INT
- The wiper operates continuously
for several seconds then operates
intermittently at intervals of about
every 8 seconds.
OFF
Precautions to observe when using wipers and washers
E00507600131
l If the moving wipers become blocked by ice
- Off
- The washer fluid will be sprayed
onto the rear window when the
knob is turned fully in either direction.
The wipers operate automatically
several times while the washer fluid is being sprayed.
l
l
NOTE
l To
4
l
4-18
ensure a clear rearward view, the wiper
performs several continuous operations when
the reverse gear is engaged while the switch
is in the “INT” position.
Following this continuous operation, the wiper will automatically switch to intermittent operation.
It is possible to activate the following functions. For further information, we recommend you to consult a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
• Adjustment of the interval for intermittent operation
• Changing intermittent wiper operation to
continuous wiper operation
l
l
or other deposits on the glass, the motor may
burn out even if the wiper switch is turned to
OFF. If obstruction occurs, park your vehicle
in a safe place, turn off the electric motor
switch, and clean the deposits from the glass
so that the wipers operate smoothly.
Do not use the wipers when the glass is dry.
They may scratch the glass surface and the
blades wear out prematurely.
Before using the wipers in cold weather,
check that the wiper blades are not frozen onto the glass. The motor may burn out if the
wipers are used with the blades frozen onto
the glass.
Avoid using the washer continuously for
more than 20 seconds. Do not operate the
washer when the fluid reservoir is empty.
Otherwise, the motor may burn out.
Periodically check the level of washer fluid
in the reservoir and refill if required.
During cold weather, add a recommended
washer solution that will not freeze in the
washer reservoir. Failure to do so could result in loss of washer function and frost damage to the system components.
Rear window demister switch
E00507901216
The rear window demister switch can be operated
when the ready indicator illuminates.
Push the switch to turn on the rear window demister. It will be turned off automatically in about 20
minutes. To turn off the demister within about 20
minutes, push the switch again.
The indication lamp (A) will illuminate while the
demister is on.
NOTE
l Since
the demister requires a significant
amount of power, stop the demister as soon
as the window is demisted.
OHAE12E5
Instruments and controls
l If your vehicle is equipped with heated mir-
l
l
l
rors, when the rear window demister switch
is pressed, the outside rear-view mirrors are
defogged or defrosted. Refer to “Heated mirror” on page 5-07.
The demister switch is not to melt snow but
to clear mist. Remove snow before use of the
demister switch.
When cleaning the inside of the rear window, use a soft cloth and wipe gently along
the heater wires, being careful not to damage
the wires.
Do not allow objects to touch the inside of
the rear window glass, damaged or broken
wires may result.
Horn switch
E00508000318
Press the steering wheel on or around the “
” mark.
4
OHAE12E5
4-19
OHAE12E5
Starting and driving
Economical driving.......................................................................5-02
Driving, alcohol and drugs...........................................................5-02
Safe driving techniques................................................................5-03
Parking brake................................................................................5-03
Parking..........................................................................................5-04
Inside rear-view mirror.................................................................5-05
Outside rear-view mirrors.............................................................5-05
Electric motor switch....................................................................5-07
Steering wheel lock......................................................................5-08
Starting the electric motor unit.....................................................5-08
Transmission.................................................................................5-09
Driving the vehicle.......................................................................5-11
Inspection and maintenance following rough road operation..........................................................................................5-12
Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System (AVAS).................................5-12
Braking.........................................................................................5-14
Brake assist system.......................................................................5-15
Anti-lock brake system (ABS).....................................................5-15
Electric power steering system (EPS)..........................................5-17
Active stability control (ASC)......................................................5-18
Cargo loads...................................................................................5-20
Trailer towing...............................................................................5-21
OHAE12E5
5
Starting and driving
Economical driving
Air conditioning
E00600101092
For economical driving, there are some technical requirements that have to be met. In order to achieve
longer life of the vehicle and the most economical
operation, we recommend you to have the vehicle
checked at regular intervals in accordance with the
service standards.
Too much cooling/heating can affect the cruising
range, so maintain an appropriate temperature to extend the cruising range.
Starting and acceleration
Avoid driving with the accelerator pedal is pushed
way down, such as for unnecessarily sudden starts,
acceleration and deceleration. Smoothly depress
the accelerator pedal.
Observe the speed limit and keep the speed as constant as possible while driving.
Driving, alcohol and drugs
E00600200070
Driving after drinking alcohol is one of the most frequent causes of accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired even
with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you have been drinking, don’t drive. Ride
with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab or
a friend, or use public transportation. Drinking coffee or taking a cold shower will not make you sober.
Similarly, prescription and nonprescription drugs affect your alertness, perception and reaction time.
Consult with your doctor or pharmacist before driving while under the influence of any of these medications.
WARNING
Idling
Parking for a long period with the ready indicator
illuminated will shorten the cruising range.
5
l
Speed
At higher vehicle speed, more traction battery is consumed. Avoid driving at full speed. Even a slight release of the accelerator pedal will save a significant
amount of traction battery.
Tyre inflation pressure
Check the tyre inflation pressures at regular intervals. Low tyre inflation pressure increases road resistance. In addition, low tyre pressures adversely
affect tyre wear and driving stability.
Cargo loads
Do not drive with unnecessary articles in the luggage compartment.
5-02
OHAE12E5
NEVER DRINK AND DRIVE.
Your perceptions are less accurate, your
reflexes are slower and your judgment is
impaired.
Starting and driving
Safe driving techniques
E00600300635
Driving safety and protection against injury cannot
be fully ensured. However, we recommend that
you pay extra attention to the following:
Seat belts
Before starting the vehicle, make sure that you and
your passengers have fastened your seat belts.
Floor mats
WARNING
l Keep floor mats clear of the pedals by correctly laying floor mats that are suitable
for the vehicle.
To prevent the floor mats from slipping
out of position, securely retain them using the hook etc.
Note that laying a floor mat over a pedal
or laying one floor mat on top of another
can obstruct pedal operation and lead to
a serious accident.
Carrying children in the vehicle
l Never leave your vehicle unattended with the
l
l
key and children inside the vehicle. Children
may play with the driving controls and this
could lead to an accident.
Make sure that infants and small children are
properly restrained in accordance with the
laws and regulations, and for maximum protection in case of an accident.
Prevent children from playing in the luggage
compartment. It is quite dangerous to allow
them to play there while the vehicle is moving.
Parking brake
E00600501647
To park the vehicle, first bring it to a complete
stop, fully apply the parking lever sufficiently to
hold the vehicle.
To apply the parking brake
Loading luggage
When loading luggage, be careful not to load
above the height of seats. This is dangerous not only because rearward vision will be obstructed, but
also the luggage may be projected into the passenger compartment under hard braking.
1- Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal,
then pull the lever up without pushing the button at the end of hand grip.
CAUTION
l
OHAE12E5
When you intend to apply the parking
brake, firmly press the brake pedal to
bring the vehicle to a complete stop before pulling the parking brake lever.
Pulling the parking brake lever with the
vehicle moving could make the rear
wheels lock up, thereby making the vehicle unstable. It could also make the parking brake malfunction.
5-03
5
Starting and driving
NOTE
l Apply
l
sufficient force to the parking brake
lever to hold the vehicle stationary after the
foot brake is released.
If the parking brake does not hold the vehicle
stationary after the foot brake is released,
have your vehicle checked immediately.
To release the parking brake
Parking
CAUTION
l If the brake warning lamp does not extin-
guish when the parking brake is fully released, the brake system may be malfunctioning.
Have your vehicle checked immediately.
For details, refer to “Brake warning
lamp” on page 4-09.
E00600601534
To park the vehicle, fully engage the parking
brake, and then move the selector lever to the “P”
(PARK) position.
Parking on a hill
To prevent the vehicle from rolling, follow these
procedures:
Parking on a downhill slope
Turn the front wheels towards the kerb and move
the vehicle forward until the kerb side wheel gently
touches the kerb.
Apply the parking brake and place the selector lever into the “P” (PARK) position.
If necessary, apply chocks to the wheels.
5
Parking on an uphill slope
Turn the front wheels away from the kerb and
move the vehicle back until the kerb side wheel gently touches the kerb.
Apply the parking brake and place the selector lever into the “P” (PARK) position.
If necessary, apply chocks to the wheels.
1- Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal,
then pull the lever up slightly.
2- Push the button at the end of hand grip.
3- Lower the lever fully.
NOTE
CAUTION
l Be
sure to apply the parking brake before
moving the selector lever to the “P” (PARK)
position. If you move the selector lever to
the “P” (PARK) position before applying the
parking brake, it may be difficult to disengage the selector lever from the “P” (PARK)
position when you next drive the vehicle, requiring application of a strong force to the selector lever to move it from the “P” (PARK)
position.
l Before
driving, be sure that the parking
brake is fully released and the brake warning lamp is off.
If a vehicle is driven without releasing the
parking brake, the brake will be overheated, resulting in ineffective braking and
possible brake failure.
5-04
OHAE12E5
Starting and driving
Parking with the electric motor unit
running
Never leave the electric motor unit running while
you take a short sleep/rest.
WARNING
l
Leaving the electric motor unit running
risks injury or death from accidentally
moving the selector lever.
Do not keep the steering wheel fully
turned for a long time
More effort could be required to turn the steering
wheel. Refer to “Electric power steering system
(EPS)” on page 5-17.
Inside rear-view mirror
Outside rear-view mirrors
E00600800672
Adjust the rear-view mirror only after making any
seat adjustments so you have a clear view to the
rear of the vehicle.
WARNING
E00600900628
To adjust the mirror position
E00601000655
The outside rear-view mirrors can be operated
when the electric motor switch is in the “ON” or
“ACC” position.
WARNING
l Do
not attempt to adjust the rear-view
mirror while driving. This can be dangerous.
Always adjust the mirror before driving.
Adjust the rear-view mirror to maximize the view
through the rear window.
When leaving the vehicle
Always carry the key and lock all doors and the tailgate when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Always try to park your vehicle in a well lit area.
OHAE12E5
l Do
l
not attempt to adjust the rear-view
mirrors while driving. This can be dangerous.
Always adjust the mirrors before driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with convex
type mirrors.
Please take into consideration, that objects you see in the mirror will look smaller and farther away compared to a normal flat mirror.
Do not use this mirror to estimate distance of following vehicles when changing
lanes.
5-05
5
Starting and driving
1. Place the lever (A) to the same side as the mirror you wish to adjust.
CAUTION
l Do not drive the vehicle with the mirror
folded in.
The lack of rearward visibility normally
provided by the mirror could lead to an
accident.
With the electric motor switch in the “ON” or
“ACC” position, push the mirror retractor switch to
retract the mirrors.
Push it again to extend the mirrors to their original
positions.
After turning the electric motor switch to the
“LOCK” position, it is possible to retract and extend the mirrors using the mirror retractor switch
for about 30 seconds.
CAUTION
l It is possible to retract and extend the mir-
rors by hand. After retracting a mirror using the mirror retractor switch, however,
you should extend it by using the switch
again, not by hand. If you extended the
mirror by hand after retracting it using
the switch, it would not properly lock in
position. As a result, it could move because of the wind or vibration while you
are driving, taking away your rearward
visibility.
NOTE
l Be
l
L- Left outside mirror adjustment
R- Right outside mirror adjustment
5
l
2. Press the switch (B) to the left, right, up or
down to adjust the mirror position.
1- Up
2- Down
3- Right
4- Left
3. Return the lever (A) back to the middle position (•).
l
Retracting and extending the outside
mirrors
E00601100669
The outside mirror can be folded in towards the
side window to prevent damage when parking in
narrow areas.
5-06
OHAE12E5
careful not to get your hands trapped
while a mirror is moving.
The mirrors can be retracted or extended
with the keyless entry system remote control
switch. Refer to “Keyless entry system” on
page 2-03.
If you move a mirror by hand or it moves after hitting a person or object, you may not be
able to return it to its original position using
the mirror retractor switch. If this happens,
push the mirror retractor switch to place the
mirror in its retracted position and then push
the switch again to return the mirror to its original position.
When freezing has occurred and mirrors fail
to operate as intended, please refrain from repeated pushing of the retractor switch as this
action can result in burn-out of the mirror motor circuits.
Starting and driving
Electric motor switch
Heated mirror*
E00601200514
E00629400013
To demist or defrost the outside rear-view mirrors,
press the rear window demister switch.
The indication lamp (A) will illuminate while the
demister is on.
The heater will be turned off automatically in about
20 minutes.
NOTE
l Your
vehicle is equipped with an electronic
immobilizer.
To start the electric motor unit, the ID code
which the transponder inside the key sends
must match the one registered in the immobilizer computer. Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)” on page
2-02.
To remove the key
E00629500014
1. Set the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position.
2. Turn the key to the “LOCK” position and remove it.
LOCK
The steering wheel is locked. The key can only be
inserted and removed in this position.
ACC
The ready indicator is not illuminated, but the audio system and other electric devices can be operated.
5
ON
NOTE
l Since
the demister requires a significant
amount of power, stop the demister as soon
as the window is demisted.
The electric motor unit is running, and all the vehicle’s electrical devices can be operated.
START
The electric motor unit operates. After the electric
motor unit has started, release the key and it will automatically return to the “ON” position.
OHAE12E5
5-07
Starting and driving
l If the ready indicator goes out while driv-
l
ing, the brake servomechanism will cease
to function and braking efficiency will deteriorate. Also, the power steering system
may not operate, the steering wheel feels
heavy when turning it.
When the ready indicator has turned off,
turn the electric motor switch to the
“LOCK” position.
Leaving the electric motor switch in the
“ON” or “ACC” position and using electrical devices such as the audio system for
a long time could cause the auxiliary battery to go flat and prevent the electric motor unit from being started.
Starting the electric motor unit
Steering wheel lock
CAUTION
E00629300012
E00601500692
To lock
Remove the key at the “LOCK” position.
Turn the steering wheel until it is locked.
To unlock
Turn the key to the “ACC” position while moving
the steering wheel slightly right and left.
CAUTION
l
Never attempt to start the electric motor
unit by pushing or pulling the vehicle.
The starting procedure is as follows:
1. Insert the key in the electric motor switch
and fasten the seat belt.
2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
3. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
4. Make sure the selector lever is in the “P”
(PARK) position.
5
CAUTION
l Remove the key when leaving the vehicle.
In some countries, it is prohibited to leave
the key in the vehicle when parked.
NOTE
l The
electric motor unit will not start unless
the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) position.
5-08
OHAE12E5
Starting and driving
5. Press the brake pedal with your right foot.
Turn the electric motor switch fully, keep it
in the “START” position for one to two seconds, and slowly return it to its original position. When you hear the startup sound and
the ready indicator comes on, startup of the
electric motor unit is complete.
Transmission
WARNING
E00603200677
Selector lever operation
E00603301037
l
NOTE
l If the ready indicator does not illuminate, re-
l
turn the electric motor switch to the “LOCK”
position once. After a while, turn it to the
“START” position to start the electric motor
unit.
To prevent a careless start, your vehicle is
equipped with electric motor reminder. Refer
to “Electric motor reminder” on page 5-09.
Always depress the brake pedal when
shifting the selector lever into the other
position from the “P” (PARK) or “N”
(NEUTRAL) position.
Never put your foot on the accelerator pedal while shifting the selector lever from
the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
NOTE
l To
l
Electric motor reminder
E00630700029
If the driver’s door is opened while the key is in
the “ON” position, the electric motor reminder buzzer sounds intermittently to remind the key is in the
electric motor switch.
avoid erroneous operation, move the selector lever firmly into each position and briefly hold it there. Always check the position
shown by the selector lever position display
after moving the selector lever.
If the brake pedal is not depressed and held,
the shift-lock device activates to prevent the
selector lever from being moved from the
“P” (PARK) position.
Selector lever reminder
E00630800017
If the driver’s door is opened while the selector lever is placed into the other positions from the “P”
(PARK) position while the electric motor switch is
on, the selector lever reminder buzzer sounds in the
interval shorter than electric motor reminder buzzer.
While depressing the brake pedal,
move the selector lever through the gate.
Move the selector lever through the gate.
OHAE12E5
5-09
5
Starting and driving
Selector lever position indicator
CAUTION
E00603400028
When the electric motor switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the position of the selector lever is
indicated on the instrument cluster.
WARNING
l If
l
l
l
the selector lever position indicator
blinks while you are driving, it is likely
that a safety device is operating because
of a malfunction in the transmission system. We recommend you to have your vehicle inspected as soon as possible.
The selector lever position indicator warning function does not operate with the selector lever in the “R” (REVERSE) position.
Selector lever positions
E00603800644
When the selector lever position indicator blinks
E00629600031
5
When the selector lever position indicator blinks
while you are driving, there could be a malfunction
in the transmission system.
“P” PARK
This position locks the transmission to prevent the
vehicle from moving. The electric motor unit can
be started in this position.
“R” REVERSE
This position is to back up.
CAUTION
l
Never shift into the “P” (PARK) or “R”
(REVERSE) position while the vehicle is
in motion to avoid transmission damage.
“N” NEUTRAL
It should only be used when the vehicle is stationary for an extended length of time during driving,
such as in a traffic jam.
5-10
OHAE12E5
l
Never move the selector lever to the “N”
(NEUTRAL) position while driving. A serious accident could occur since you
could accidentally move the lever into the
“P” (PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position
or you will lose regenerative braking.
On a gradient, the electric motor unit
should be started in the “P” (PARK) position, not in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
Always keep your right foot on the brake
pedal when shifting into or out of “N”
(NEUTRAL), to minimize the risk of loss
of control.
“D” DRIVE
This position is for normal driving.
Regenerative braking is automatically applied
when necessary, depending on road conditions.
CAUTION
l Never
shift into the “D” (DRIVE) position from the “R” (REVERSE) position
while the vehicle is in motion to avoid
transmission damage.
“B” BRAKE
This position gives stronger regenerative braking
than the “D” (DRIVE) position. It increases the vehicle’s usability on hills and enables more energyefficient driving. It is intended for downhill driving.
Starting and driving
Driving the vehicle
WARNING
l
Avoid sudden regenerative braking when
driving on wet or icy roads. Using sudden
regenerative braking under these conditions could cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in a serious accident.
E00629800020
CAUTION
l
NOTE
l When the traction battery level is nearly full
or the traction battery temperature is low, the
regenerative braking performance may be
weakened. In this case, drive the vehicle at a
low speed.
“C” COMFORT
This position gives weaker regenerative braking
than the “D” (DRIVE) position. It enables relaxed
driving in circumstances in which you do not accelerate or decelerate much (for example, suburban
driving). It is intended for long cruising.
CAUTION
E00629700016
Operation of the transmission
l
l
Before selecting a position with the electric motor unit running and the vehicle
stationary, fully depress the brake pedal
to prevent the vehicle from creeping.
The vehicle will begin to move as soon as
the transmission is engaged, the brakes
should only be released when you are
ready to drive away.
Depress the brake pedal with the right
foot at all times.
Using the left foot could cause driver movement delay in case of an emergency.
Operating the accelerator pedal while the
other foot is resting on the brake pedal
will affect braking efficiency and may
cause premature wear of brake pads.
Waiting
E00630900018
For short waiting periods, such as at traffic signals
the vehicle can be left in selector lever position and
held stationary with the service brake.
For longer waiting periods with the electric motor
unit running, place the selector lever in the “N”
(NEUTRAL) position and apply the parking brake,
while holding the vehicle stationary with the service brake.
OHAE12E5
l Never hold the vehicle stationary while in
transmission on a hill with the accelerator, always apply the parking brake and/
or service brake.
Parking
E00631000016
To park the vehicle, first bring it to a complete
stop, fully engage the parking brake, and then
move the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position.
If you are going to leave the vehicle unattended, always switch off the electric motor unit and carry
the key.
NOTE
l On
a slope, be sure to apply the parking
brake before moving the selector lever to the
“P” (PARK) position. If you move the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position before
applying the parking brake, it may be difficult to disengage the selector lever from the
“P” (PARK) position when you next drive
the vehicle, requiring application of a strong
force to the selector lever to move it from the
“P” (PARK) position.
5-11
5
Starting and driving
Inspection and maintenance
following rough road operation
Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System
(AVAS)
E00606700383
E00631600012
After operating the vehicle in rough road conditions, be sure to perform the following inspection
and maintenance procedures:
l Check that the vehicle has not been damaged
by rocks, gravel, etc.
l Carefully wash the vehicle with water.
Drive the vehicle slowly while lightly depressing the brake pedal in order to dry out the
brakes. If the brakes still do not function properly, we recommend you to have the brakes
checked as soon as possible.
l Remove the insects, dried grass, etc. clogging the radiator core.
l Check the inside of the vehicle. If water entry is found, dry the carpet etc.
l Inspect the headlamps, If the headlamp bulb
is flooded with water, we recommend you to
have it drained.
The Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System (AVAS) is
a device that uses sound to alert pedestrians of the
presence of the vehicle. The system operates when
the vehicle speed is about 35 km/h (22 mph) or less.
The sound starts when the AVAS is operated in the
following conditions.
l When the vehicle speed is about 3 km/h
(2 mph) or less and the brake pedal is not depressed.
l When the vehicle speed is about 3 km/h
(2 mph) to 35 km/h (22 mph).
5
5-12
The sound does not start in the following cases.
l When the vehicle speed is about 3 km/h
(2 mph) or less and the brake pedal is depressed.
l When the vehicle speed is about 35 km/h
(22 mph) or more.
l When the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK)
position.
l When the indication lamp (A) in the AVAS
OFF switch illuminates.
OHAE12E5
Under normal conditions, the indication lamp (A) illuminates when the electric motor switch is turned
to the “ON” position and goes off a few seconds later.
WARNING
l Even if the Acoustic Vehicle Alerting Sys-
tem (AVAS) sounds, pay special attention
to pedestrians.
Pedestrians may not notice the oncoming
vehicle, which may cause an accident resulting in serious personal injury or death.
Starting and driving
If pressing the AVAS OFF switch once again, the
AVAS is activated.
CAUTION
l Always
confirm the indication lamp (A)
goes off before driving.
If the indication lamp (A) blinks, the electric motor switch is turned to the
“LOCK” position and the electric motor
switch is turned to the “ON” position
again. It is not abnormal if the indication
lamp (A) goes off. If the indication lamp
(A) blinks again, have the vehicle inspected by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point as soon as possible.
l If
the AVAS OFF switch is continuously
pressed after the AVAS is turned off, the incorrect operation prevention function works
and the system turns on again.
AVAS OFF switch
E00631700013
If the electric motor switch is turned on, the AVAS
is automatically turned on.
The AVAS should be turned on while normal driving.
When driving on the freeway etc., it is possible to
turn off the AVAS by pressing the AVAS OFF
switch.
If pressing the AVAS OFF switch, the audible
alarm does not sound and indication lamp (A) illuminates.
WARNING
l
5
Never turn the Acoustic Vehicle Alerting
System (AVAS) off if you are in a place
where pedestrians might be present.
NOTE
l If
the electric motor switch is turned to the
“ACC” or “LOCK” position while the
AVAS has been turned off, and the electric
motor switch is turned to the “ON” position
again, the AVAS is activated.
OHAE12E5
5-13
Starting and driving
Braking
WARNING
E00607001830
All the parts of the brake system are critical to safety. We recommend you to have the vehicle
checked at regular intervals according to the service booklet.
CAUTION
l Avoid
driving habits that cause heavy
braking and never “ride” the brakes by
resting your foot on the brake pedal
while driving.
It causes brake overheating and fading.
Brake system
5
The service brake is divided into two brake circuits. And your vehicle is equipped with power
brakes. If one brake circuit fails, the other is available to stop the vehicle. If you should lose the power assist for some reason, the brakes will still work.
In these situations, even if the brake pedal moves
down to the very end of its possible stroke or resists being depressed, keep depressing the brake pedal down harder and further than usual; stop driving
as soon as possible and have the brake system repaired.
l
If the power assist is lost or if either
brake hydraulic system stops working
properly, have your vehicle checked immediately.
l
Warning lamp
The brake warning lamp illuminates to indicate a
fault in the braking system. Refer to “Brake warning lamp” on page 4-09.
When brakes are wet
Check the brake system while driving at a low
speed immediately after starting, especially when
the brakes are wet, to confirm they work normally.
A film of water can be formed on the brake discs
or brake drums and prevent normal braking after
driving in heavy rain or through large puddles, or
after the vehicle is washed. If this occurs, dry the
brakes out by driving slowly while lightly depressing the brake pedal.
When driving downhill
It is important to take advantage of regenerative
braking by shifting to the “B” (BRAKE) position
while driving on steep downhill roads in order to
prevent the brakes from overheating.
WARNING
l Do
not turn off the electric motor unit
while your vehicle is in motion. If you
turn off the electric motor unit while driving, the power assistance for the braking
system will stop working and your brakes
will not work effectively.
5-14
WARNING
OHAE12E5
Do not leave any objects near the brake
pedal or let a floor mat slide under it; doing so could prevent the full pedal stroke
that would be necessary in an emergency.
Make sure that the pedal can be operated
freely at all times. Make sure the floor
mat is securely held in place.
Brake pad and linings
l Avoid hard braking situations.
l
New brakes need to be broken-in by moderate use for the first 200 km (125 miles).
The disc brakes are provided with a warning
device which emits a shrieking metallic
sound while braking if the brake pads have
reached their wear limit. If you hear this
sound, have the brake pads replaced immediately.
WARNING
l
Driving with worn brake pads will make
it harder to stop, and can cause an accident.
Starting and driving
Brake assist system
l When the brake assist system is in use, you
E00627000174
The brake assist system is a device assisting drivers
who cannot depress the brake pedal firmly when it
is necessary to do so (such as in emergency stop situations) and provides greater braking force.
If the brake pedal is depressed suddenly, the brakes
will be applied with more force than usual.
CAUTION
l The brake assist system is not a device designed to exercise braking force greater
than its capacity. Make sure to always
keep a sufficient distance between vehicles in front of you without relying too
much on the brake assist system.
l
may feel as if the depressed brake pedal is
soft, the pedal moves in small motions in conjunction with the sound of the ABS operation, or the vehicle body and the steering
wheel vibrate. This occurs when the brake assist system is operating normally and does
not indicate faulty operation. Continue to
firmly depress the brake pedal.
You may hear an operation noise when the
brake pedal is depressed suddenly while stationary. This does not indicate a malfunction
and the brake assist system is operating normally.
E00607101394
The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps prevent
the wheels from locking during braking. This helps
maintain vehicle drivability and steering wheel handling.
Driving hints
l Always keep a safe distance from the vehicle
l
NOTE
l
l Once
l
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
the brake assist system is operational,
it maintains great braking force even if the
brake pedal is lightly released.
To stop its operation, completely remove
your foot from the brake pedal.
The brake assist system may become operational when the brake pedal is fully depressed even if it has not been depressed suddenly.
l
OHAE12E5
in front of you. Even if your vehicle is equipped with ABS, leave a greater braking distance when:
• Driving on gravel or snow-covered roads.
• Driving with tyre chains installed.
• Driving on uneven road surfaces.
Operation of ABS is not restricted to situations where brakes are applied suddenly.
This system may also prevent the wheels
from locking when you drive over manholes,
steel roadwork plates, road markings, or any
uneven road surface.
When the ABS is activated, you may feel the
brake pedal pulsation and the vibrations of
the vehicle body and steering wheel. It may
also feel as if the pedal resists being pressed.
In this situation, simply hold the brake pedal down firmly. Do not pump the brake,
which will result in reduced braking performance.
An operation noise may be emitted from the
bonnet room in the following situations. The
sound is associated with checking the operations of the anti-lock brake system.
At this time, you may feel a shock from the
brake pedal if you depress it. These do not indicate a malfunction.
• When the electric motor switch is turned
to the “ON” position.
5-15
5
Starting and driving
l
• When the vehicle is driven for a while after the electric motor is turned on.
The ABS can be used after the vehicle has
reached a speed over approximately 10 km/h
(6 mph). It stops working when the vehicle
slows below approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).
CAUTION
l
CAUTION
l
l The
l
Under normal conditions, the ABS warning lamp
only comes on when the electric motor switch is
turned to the “ON” position and goes off a few seconds later.
ABS cannot prevent accidents. It is
your responsibility to take safety precautions and to drive carefully.
To prevent failure of the ABS, be sure
wheels and tyres are of the specified size
and the same type.
Do not install any aftermarket limitedslip differential (LSD) on your vehicle.
The ABS may stop functioning properly.
ABS warning lamp
Any of the following indicates that the
ABS is not functioning and only the standard brake system is working. (The standard brake system is functioning normally.) If this happens, we recommend you to
have your vehicle inspected as soon as possible.
• When the electric motor switch is
turned to the “ON” position, the warning lamp does not come on or it remains on and does not go off.
• The warning lamp comes on while driving
E00607201207
5
If the warning lamp illuminates while
driving
E00607301338
If there is a malfunction in the system, the ABS
warning lamp will come on.
5-16
If only the ABS warning lamp illuminates
Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving. Stop
the vehicle in a safe place, put the selector lever to
the “P” (PARK) position and turn off the electric
motor unit.
Restart the electric motor unit and check to see
whether the lamp goes out after a few minutes driving; if it then remains off during driving, there is
no problem.
However, if the warning lamp does not disappear,
or if it comes on again when the vehicle is driven,
we recommend you to have the vehicle checked.
OHAE12E5
If the ABS warning lamp and brake warning
lamp illuminate at the same time
The ABS and brake force distribution function may
not work, so hard braking could make the vehicle
unstable.
Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving. Stop
the vehicle in a safe place and we recommend you
to have it checked.
NOTE
l The warning lamp may be illuminated when
the electric motor unit is started while the auxiliary battery voltage is low, but this is not an
ABS malfunction.
When the traction battery is charged, the auxiliary battery is charged at the same time, and
the warning lamp will go out.
If the warning lamp does not go out or illuminates from time to time even after the battery
is charged, have the vehicle inspected at a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
Point.
Starting and driving
After driving on icy roads
E00618800176
After driving on snowy or icy roads, remove any
snow and ice which may have be left around the
wheels. Be careful not to damage the wheel speed
sensors (A) or the cables located at each wheel.
Front
Rear
Electric power steering system
(EPS)
NOTE
l During repeated full-lock turning of the steer-
E00629200138
The electric power steering system (EPS) uses an
electric motor to assist the turning of the steering
wheel.
The power steering system operates while the electric motor unit is running. It helps reduce the effort
needed to turn the steering wheel.
The power steering system has mechanical steering
capability in case the power assist is lost. If the power assist is lost for some reason, you will still be
able to steer your vehicle. If the power assist is
lost, you will notice it takes much more effort to
steer and that there is much more “free play” in the
steering wheel. If this happens, we recommend you
to have your vehicle inspected.
WARNING
l Do not stop the electric motor unit while
l
ing wheel (for example, while you are manoeuvring the vehicle into a parking space),
a protection function may be activated to prevent overheating of the power steering system. This function will make the steering
wheel gradually harder to turn. In this event,
limit your turning of the steering wheel for a
while. When the system has cooled down,
the steering action will return to normal.
If you turn the steering wheel while the vehicle is stationary with the headlamps on, the
headlamps may become dim. This behaviour
is not abnormal. The headlamps will return
to their original brightness after a short while.
Electric power steering system warning lamp
Type 1
5
the vehicle is moving. Stopping the electric motor unit would make the steering
wheel extremely hard to turn, possibly resulting in an accident.
OHAE12E5
5-17
Starting and driving
Active stability control (ASC)
Type 2
E00616700429
The Active Stability Control (ASC) takes overall
control of the anti-lock brake system, traction control function and stability control function to help
maintain the vehicle’s control. Please read this section in conjunction with the page on the anti-lock
brake system, traction control function and stability
control function.
If there is a malfunction in the system, the warning
lamp will come on.
Under normal conditions, the warning lamp comes
on when the electric motor switch is turned to the
“ON” position and goes off a few seconds later.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ® p. 5-15
Traction control function ® p. 5-18
Stability control function ® p. 5-19
CAUTION
l
CAUTION
5
l If the warning lamp appears during driv-
ing, it may become harder to turn the steering wheel.
If the warning lamp appears while driving
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place, put the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position and turn
off the electric motor unit.
2. Restart the electric motor unit to check whether the warning lamp goes out; if it then remains off, there is no problem.
If the warning lamp does not go out, or it appears again while driving, we recommend
you to have your vehicle inspected.
5-18
l
l
Do not over-rely on the ASC. Even the
ASC cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle.
This system, like any other system, has
limits and cannot help you to maintain
traction and control of the vehicle in all
circumstances. Reckless driving may lead
to accidents. It is the driver’s responsibility to drive carefully. This means taking
into account the traffic, road and environmental conditions.
Be sure to use the specified type and size
of tyre on all 4 wheels. Otherwise, the
ASC may not work properly.
Do not install any aftermarket limitedslip differential (LSD) on your vehicle.
The ASC may stop functioning properly.
OHAE12E5
NOTE
l An operation noise may be emitted from the
l
l
bonnet room in the following situations. The
sound is associated with checking the operations of the ASC. At this time, you may feel
a shock from the brake pedal if you depress
it. These do not indicate a malfunction.
• When the electric motor switch is turned
to the “ON” position.
• When the vehicle is driven for a while after the electric motor is turned on.
When the ASC is activated, you may feel a
vibration in the vehicle body or hear a whining sound from the bonnet room.
This indicates that the system is operating normally. It does not indicate a malfunction.
When the anti-lock brake system warning
lamp is illuminated, the ASC is not active.
Traction control function
E00619000087
On slippery surfaces, the traction control function
prevents the drive wheels from spinning excessively, thus helping the vehicle to start moving from a
stopped condition. It also provides sufficient driving force and steering performance as the vehicle
turns while pressing the acceleration pedal.
CAUTION
l When driving a vehicle on a snowy or icy
road, be sure to install snow tyres and
drive the vehicle at moderate speeds.
Starting and driving
Stability control function
E00619100088
The stability control function is designed to help
the driver maintain control of the vehicle on slippery roads or during rapid steering manoeuvres. It
works by controlling the electric motor unit output
and the brake on each wheel.
indication
When the ASC is deactivated, the
lamp will turn on. To reactivate the ASC, momentarily press the “ASC OFF” switch; the
indication lamp is turned off.
NOTE
l When
l
NOTE
l The
stability control function operates at
speeds of about 15 km/h (9 mph) or higher.
l
“ASC OFF” switch
E00619200496
The ASC is automatically activated when the electric motor switch is turned to the “ON” position.
You can deactivate the system by pressing down
the “ASC OFF” switch for 3 seconds or longer.
moving out of mud, sand or fresh
snow, pressing the accelerator pedal may not
allow the electric motor speed to increase. In
such situations, temporarily turning off the
ASC with the “ASC OFF” switch will make
it easier to move out your vehicle.
Using the “ASC OFF” switch turns off both
the stability control function and the traction
control function.
If you continue to press the “ASC OFF”
switch after the ASC is turned off, the “mistaken operation protection function” will activate and the ASC will turn back on.
ASC indication lamp or ASC OFF indication lamp
E00619300556
-
CAUTION
l For
l
safety reasons, the “ASC OFF”
switch should be operated when your vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep the ASC on while driving
in normal circumstances.
OHAE12E5
-
ASC indication lamp
The indication lamp will blink
when the ASC is operating.
ASC OFF indication lamp
This indication lamp will turn on
when the ASC is turned off with the
“ASC OFF” switch.
CAUTION
l When the
indication lamp blinks, ASC
is operating, which means that the road is
slippery or that your vehicle’s wheels are
beginning to slip. If this happens, drive
slower with less accelerator input.
5-19
5
Starting and driving
If the indication lamp illuminates
while driving
E00624400089
E00631100017
If an abnormal condition occurs in the system, the
indication lamp and indication lamp will turn
on.
CAUTION
l
The system may be malfunctioning.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place, put the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position
and turn off the electric motor unit.
Restart the electric motor unit and check
whether the indication lamp goes out. If
they go out, there is no abnormal condition. If they do not go out or appear frequently, it is not necessary to stop the vehicle immediately, but we recommend
you to have your vehicle inspected.
Cargo loads
Towing
CAUTION
E00609901413
Cargo load precautions
l When
towing the vehicle with only the
front wheels raised off the ground, do not
place the electric motor switch in the
“ON” position. Placing the electric motor
switch in the “ON” position could cause
the ASC to operate, resulting in an accident.
Note that the correct towing method depends on the vehicle’s drive configuration. For details, refer to “Towing” on
page 7-10.
CAUTION
l Do not load cargo or luggage higher than
l
the top of the seatback. Be sure that your
cargo or luggage cannot move once your
vehicle is moving. Having the driver’s vision blocked, and your cargo being
thrown inside the cabin if you suddenly
have to brake can cause a serious accident or injury.
Load heavy cargo or luggage in the front
of the vehicle. If the load in the back of
the vehicle is too heavy, steering may become unstable.
Loading a roof carrier
5
CAUTION
l Use a roof carrier that properly fits your
l
5-20
OHAE12E5
vehicle. Do not load luggage directly onto
the roof.
For installation, refer to the instruction
manual accompanying the roof carrier.
When attaching/removing the roof carrier and loading/removing luggage, do not
apply excessive pressure on a single point.
Depending on how and where the force is
applied, this may cause dents on the vehicle roof.
Starting and driving
NOTE
l We
recommend you to use a genuine
MITSUBISHI roof carrier.
Roof carrier precautions
CAUTION
l
l
Make sure that the weight of the luggage
does not exceed the allowable roof load
(43 kg).
If the allowable roof load is exceeded, this
may cause damage to the vehicle.
The roof load is the total allowable load
on the roof (the weight of the roof carrier
plus the weight of luggage placed on the
roof carrier).
When luggage is loaded onto the vehicle,
please make sure to drive slowly and
avoid excessive manoeuvres such as sudden braking or quick turning.
In addition, place the luggage on the carrier so that its weight is distributed evenly with the heaviest items on the bottom.
Do not load items that are wider than the
roof carrier.
The additional weight on the roof could
raise the vehicle’s centre of gravity and affect vehicle handling characteristics.
As a result, driving errors or emergency
manoeuvres could lead to a loss of control
and result in an accident.
CAUTION
Trailer towing
E00610000244
l Before
driving and after travelling a
short distance, always check the load to
make sure it is securely fastened to the
roof carrier.
Check periodically during your travel
that the load remains secure.
NOTE
l To prevent wind noise, remove the roof carrier when not in use.
l Remove the roof carrier before using an automatic car wash.
sure that adequate clearance is maintained for raising the tailgate when installing
a roof carrier.
l Be
WARNING
l Do not use this vehicle for trailer towing.
It may cause an accident or damage the
vehicle.
5
OHAE12E5
5-21
OHAE12E5
For pleasant driving
Remote Climate Control...............................................................6-02
Ventilators....................................................................................6-02
Air conditioning............................................................................6-04
Important operation tips for the air conditioning..........................6-09
Air purifier....................................................................................6-10
LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD player*................6-10
To play tracks from USB device*................................................6-20
Error codes....................................................................................6-26
Error codes (iPod).........................................................................6-27
Error codes (USB memory device)..............................................6-28
Handling of compact discs...........................................................6-29
Antenna.........................................................................................6-30
Digital clock*...............................................................................6-31
Link System*................................................................................6-33
USB input terminal*.....................................................................6-33
Sun visors.....................................................................................6-35
Accessory socket..........................................................................6-36
Interior lamps................................................................................6-37
Storage spaces...............................................................................6-39
Cup holder....................................................................................6-40
Assist grips...................................................................................6-41
OHAE12E5
6
For pleasant driving
Ventilators
Remote Climate Control
Air flow and direction adjustments
E00700200879
E00700100911
E00735400022
You can run the air conditioning in advance of using the vehicle.
For details, refer to “Remote Climate Control” on
page 1-22.
Centre ventilators
Move the knob (A) and ventilator to adjust.
1- Left-right adjustment
2- Up-down adjustment
Side ventilators
When the dimple (A) is pressed, the ventilators open.
To close the ventilators, press the dimple (B) on
the opposite side.
6
1- Centre ventilators
2- Side ventilators
NOTE
l Do not place beverages on top of the instru-
ment panel.
If they splash into the air conditioning ventilators, they could damage the system.
6-02
OHAE12E5
For pleasant driving
NOTE
l The cool air from the ventilators may appear
Foot/demister position
Air flows to the leg area, the windscreen and the
door windows.
l
Demister position
Air flows mainly to the windscreen and the door
windows.
as a mist. This is due to moist air being suddenly cooled by the air conditioning. This
will clear after a few moments.
Be careful not to spill drinks, etc., into the
ventilators.
Doing so might cause the air conditioning
not to function normally.
Mode selection dial
E00726500362
To change the amount of air flowing from the ventilators, turn the mode selection dial.
“AUTO” position
The ventilators change to the following positions according to the position of the temperature control dial.
Refer to “Temperature control dial” on page 6-05.
Temperature control dial position
Ventilator
Between “C” and middle (•)
: Upper part
of the passenger
compartment
Middle (•) Set the dial to mid: Upper part
dle (•) from the of the passenger
“C” side
compartment
Face position
Air flows only to the upper part of the passenger
compartment.
Between
middle (•)
and “H”
Set the dial to middle (•) from the
“H” side
: Leg area
Near middle (•)
: Leg area
Near “H”
Foot/face position
Air flows to the upper part of the passenger compartment, and flows to the leg area.
CAUTION
l When
using the mode selection dial between the “ ” and “ ” positions, prevent fogging by pressing the air selection
switch to select outside air. (Refer to “Air
selection switch” on page 6-05.)
NOTE
l With
l
the mode selection dial between the
“ ” and “ ” positions, the air flows mainly to the upper part of the passenger compartment. With the mode selection dial between
the “ ” and “ ” positions, the air flows
mainly to the leg area.
With the mode selection dial between the
“ ” and “ ” positions, the air flows mainly to the leg area. With the mode selection dial between the “ ” and “ ” positions, the
air flows mainly to the windscreen and door
windows.
6
: Leg area,
windscreen and
door windows
Foot position
Air flows mainly to the leg area.
OHAE12E5
6-03
For pleasant driving
Air conditioning
Control panel
E00700600567
E00700500478
The air conditioning can only be used when the
ready indicator is illuminated.
NOTE
l If the energy level gauge is at 0 bars or the
power down warning lamp illuminates, the
vehicle interior may not be cooled/heated
even though the dial or switch is operated.
Furthermore, the demist performance may also be reduced.
Refer to “Energy level gauge” on page 4-06.
Refer to “Power down warning lamp” on
page 4-11.
Blower speed selection dial
E00700700281
Select the blower speed by turning the blower
speed selection dial clockwise or anticlockwise.
Turn the dial clockwise to increase the air flow and
anticlockwise to decrease the air flow.
When the dial is set to the “AUTO” position, the
air flow is adjusted automatically according to the
temperature of the interior and the position of the
temperature control dial.
ABCDEF-
6
Temperature control dial
MAX switch
Blower speed selection dial
Air conditioning switch
Mode selection dial
Air selection switch
NOTE
l There
is an interior air temperature sensor
(G) in the illustrated position.
Never place anything over the sensor, since
doing so will prevent it from functioning properly.
6-04
OHAE12E5
For pleasant driving
Temperature control dial
E00700900401
Turn the temperature control dial clockwise or anticlockwise.
When the dial is set to the middle (•) position, only
uncooled and unheated air will flow.
When the dial is moved to the middle (•) position
when using cooling or heating, the cooling or heating stops.
l When
the temperature control dial is set to
the “C” position, the air selection changes automatically to the recirculation position and
the air conditioning operates.
When the dial is moved thereafter, the air conditioning continues to operate and the air selection setting returns to the setting before
the dial was set to the “C” position.
CAUTION
l Normally, use the outside position to keep
Air selection switch
E00701300747
To change the air selection, simply press the air selection switch.
l Outside air: Indication lamp (A) is OFF
Outside air is introduced into the passenger
compartment.
l Recirculated air: Indication lamp (A) is ON
Air is recirculated inside the passenger compartment.
l
the windscreen and side windows clear
and quickly remove fog or frost from the
windscreen.
If high cooling performance is desired, or
if the outside air is dusty or otherwise contaminated use the recirculation position.
Switch to the outside position periodically
to increase ventilation so that the windows do not become fogged up.
Use of the recirculation position for extended time may cause the windows to fog up.
Air conditioning switch (Air conditioning)
E00701500954
Push the switch to turn the air conditioning on, the
indication lamp (A) will come on.
NOTE
l When the dial is moved from the middle (•)
l
position to the left while the air conditioning
is not operating, the air temperature will not
change.
When the dial is moved to the middle (•) position and then to the left while the air conditioning is operating, the air conditioning is operated again.
6
Push the switch again to switch it off.
OHAE12E5
6-05
For pleasant driving
MAX switch
E00765300017
When the blower speed selection dial is not OFF
and the MAX switch is pressed, the indication
lamp (A) illuminates and cooling/heating performance and the air conditioning setting is changed according to the temperature control dial position.
When the switch is pressed again, the operation returns to the mode before pressing the switch.
4. Select the desired blower speed.
NOTE
l When the blower speed selection dial or tem-
l
l
perature control dial is operated with the indication lamp illuminated, the indication lamp
goes out and the selected function overrides
others.
Other functions return to the mode before
pressing the MAX switch.
When the air conditioning is operated with
the MAX switch, the air conditioning does
not stop if the function is cancelled.
Do not use the cooling/heating function with
the MAX switch for a long time. Since the
power consumption is larger than cooling/
heating not using the MAX switch, the cruising range is shortened.
NOTE
l When
Operating the air conditioning system
E00701800465
When the temperature control dial is set between the middle (•) and the “H” position
The heating capability is the maximum.
6
When the temperature control dial is in the middle (•) position
The air flow is the maximum.
Heating
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” position
2. Set the selection switch (A) to the outside position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial clockwise
or anticlockwise to the desired temperature
between the middle (•) and “H” position.
the blower speed selection dial is set
to the “AUTO” position, the air flow is adjusted automatically according to the temperature of the interior and the position of the temperature control dial.
When the temperature control dial is set between the “C” and the middle (•) position
The air conditioning automatically operates and the
cooling capability is the maximum.
Quick heating
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “
tion.
6-06
OHAE12E5
” posi-
For pleasant driving
2. Set the air selection switch (A) to the outside
position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial clockwise
or anticlockwise between the middle (•) position and “H” position.
4. Turn the blower speed selection dial to any
position other than “OFF” position.
5. Press the MAX switch (B).
Cooling
l If the outside air is dusty or otherwise con-
taminated, or if high-cooling performance is desired, set the air selection switch
to the recirculation position and the temperature control dial all the way to the left.
Switch to the outside position periodically
to increase ventilation so that the windows do not become fogged up.
RHD
LHD
CAUTION
E00701900714
NOTE
l When
NOTE
l Do
not use the heating function with the
MAX switch for a long time. Since the power consumption is larger than heating not using the MAX switch, the cruising range is
shortened.
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” position.
2. Set the air selection switch (A) to the outside
position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial clockwise
or anticlockwise to the desired temperature
between the middle (•) and “C” position.
4. Select the desired blower speed.
5. Push the air conditioning switch (B).
6. When the air conditioning is operating, the
switch indication lamp (C) illuminates.
OHAE12E5
the blower speed selection dial is set
to the “AUTO” position, the air flow is adjusted automatically according to the temperature of the interior and the position of the temperature control dial.
6
6-07
For pleasant driving
Demisting of the windscreen and door windows
Quick cooling
For quick demisting
E00702100830
E00765400018
CAUTION
LHD
RHD
l For
safety, make sure you have a clear
view through all the windows.
Use the mode selection dial (“ ” or “ ”) to remove frost or mist from the windscreen or door windows.
6
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” position.
2. Set the air selection switch (A) to the recirculation position.
3. Turn the temperature control clockwise or anticlockwise between the middle (•) and “C”
position.
4. Turn the blower speed selection dial to any
position other than “OFF” position.
5. Press the MAX switch (B).
The air conditioning automatically operates
and the indication lamp (C) illuminates.
For ordinary demisting
Perform the following settings to prevent misting
of the windscreen and door windows, and to heat
the leg area.
NOTE
l When the mode selection dial is in the “
l
NOTE
l Do
not use the cooling function with the
MAX switch for a long time. Since the power consumption is larger than cooling not using the MAX switch, the cruising range is
shortened.
6-08
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” position.
2. Turn the temperature control dial clockwise
or anticlockwise to the desired temperature
between the middle (•) and “H” position.
3. Press the MAX switch (A).
1. Set the air selection switch (A) to the outside
position.
2. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial clockwise
or anticlockwise to the desired temperature
between the middle (•) and “H” position.
4. Select the desired blower speed.
5. Push the air conditioning switch (B).
OHAE12E5
l
l
”
position, the system operates automatically
and outside air is set automatically.
To demist effectively, direct the air flow
from the side ventilators towards the door windows.
Do not set the temperature control dial to the
max. cool position. Cool air will blow
against the window glasses and prevent demisting.
Since demisting or defrosting with the MAX
switch consumes the power greatly, stop the
switch after demisting or defrosting.
Use for a long time may shorten the cruising
range.
For pleasant driving
Introduction of outside air
E00702200424
To introduce air into the vehicle during hot weather, follow these procedures:
1. Set the mode selection dial to any position
other than “ ” position.
2. Turn the temperature control dial to the middle (•) position.
3. Set the air selection switch (A) to the outside
position.
4. Select the desired blower speed.
Important operation tips for the
air conditioning
E00708301020
l Park the vehicle in the shade.
l
l
l
NOTE
l When
the temperature control dial is turned
to the middle (•) position while the air conditioning is operating, the air conditioning
turns off.
l
Parking in the hot sun will make the vehicle
inside extremely hot, and it will require more
time to cool the interior.
If it is necessary to park in the sun, open the
windows for the first few minutes of air conditioning operation to expel the hot air.
Close the windows when the air conditioning
is in use.
The entry of outside air through open windows will reduce the cooling efficiency.
Too much cooling is not good for the health.
Keep the difference between the vehicle interior temperature and outside temperature to 5
to 6 °C.
When operating the system, make sure the
air intake, which is located in front of the
windscreen, is free of obstructions such as
leaves and snow. Leaves collected in the airintake plenum may reduce air flow and plug
the plenum water drains.
Too much cooling/heating can affect the cruising range, so maintain an appropriate temperature to extend the cruising range.
Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will cause
severe damage which will result in the need to replace your vehicle’s entire air conditioning system.
The release of refrigerant into the atmosphere is
not recommended.
The new refrigerant HFC-134a in your vehicle will
not harm the ozone layer.
We recommend you to recover and recycle the refrigerant for reuse.
During a long period of disuse
The air conditioning should be operated for at least
five minutes each week, even in cold weather. This
is to prevent the compressor from seizing and to
maintain the air conditioning in the best operating
condition.
6
Air conditioning system refrigerant
and lubricant recommendations
If the air conditioning seems less effective than usual, the cause might be a refrigerant leak. We recommend you to have the system inspected.
The air conditioning system in your vehicle must
be charged with the refrigerant HFC-134a and the
lubricant POE MA68EV.
OHAE12E5
6-09
For pleasant driving
Air purifier
E00708400561
An air filter has been incorporated into the air conditioning so that pollen and dust are cleaned from
the air.
Replace the air filter periodically as its ability to
clean the air will be reduced as it collects pollen
and dirt. For the maintenance interval, refer to the
“SERVICE BOOKLET”.
NOTE
l Operation in certain conditions such as driv-
ing on a dusty road and frequent use of the
air conditioning can lead to reduction of service life of the filter. When you feel that the
air flow is lower than normal or when the
windscreen or windows start to fog up easily,
replace the air filter.
We recommend you to have it checked.
LW/MW/FM electronic tuning
radio with CD player*
E00708601153
E00708502250
The audio system can be used when the electric motor switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
NOTE
l To listen to the audio system while the elecl
l
tric motor unit is stopped, turn the electric motor switch to the “ACC” position.
If a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle,
it may create noise from the audio equipment. This does not mean that anything is
wrong with your audio equipment. In such a
case, use the cellular phone at a place as far
away as possible from the audio equipment.
If foreign objects or water get into the audio
equipment, or if smoke or a strange odour
comes from it, immediately turn off the audio system. We recommend you to have it
checked. Never try to repair it by yourself.
Avoid continuous usage without inspection
by a qualified person.
6
6-10
Volume and tone control panel
OHAE12E5
12345-
VOLUME (Volume control) knob
SEEK (Audio adjust) button
Display
POWER (On-Off) button
(Mode change) button
To adjust the volume
E00708700678
Turn the VOLUME knob clockwise to increase the
volume; anticlockwise to decrease the volume.
The status will be displayed in the display.
For pleasant driving
NOTE
l The volume control mode will shut off auto-
matically if another mode is selected, or if no
adjustment is made within about 2 seconds.
Adjust
mode
BASS
TREBLE
To adjust the tone
E00708801285
1. Press the
button repeatedly to select the
tone, balance and SCV (Speed Compensated
Volume) function control to change. The order is: BASS → TREBLE → FADER →
BALANCE → SCV → Audio adjust mode
OFF
2. Press the SEEK button to change the tone, balance and SCV function setting.
The status will be displayed in the display.
Adjust level
-6 to 6
Adjusting operation
Stronger
Weaker
Stronger
Weaker
FADER
F11 to R11
F (Front) R (Rear)
increases increases
BALANCE
L11 to R11
R (Right) L (Left)
increases increases
SCV
HIGH, MID,
LOW, OFF
HIGH
↑
MID
↑
LOW
↑
OFF
HIGH
↓
MID
↓
LOW
↓
OFF
BASS (Bass tone control)
To select the desired bass level.
NOTE
l Keep the FADER setting in the middle posi-
tion. Since no rear speakers are connected, adjusting the FADER setting towards the “R”
side will result in loss of sound output.
SCV (Speed Compensated Volume) function
The Speed Compensated Volume function is a feature that automatically adjusts the VOLUME,
BASS and TREBLE settings in accordance with
the vehicle speed.
The effects of the SCV function can be selected either of three levels (LOW, MID and HIGH). Select
the degree of your choice by pressing the SEEK button.
If you want to stop the SCV function, select the OFF.
NOTE
l The
audio adjust mode will automatically
shut off when another mode is selected, or if
no adjustment is made within about 10 seconds.
TREBLE (Treble tone control)
To select the desired treble level.
6
FADER (Front/Rear balance control)
To balance the volume from the F (front) and the R
(rear) speakers.
A- Adjust mode
B- Adjust level
BALANCE (Left/Right balance control)
To balance the volume from the L (left) and the R
(right) speakers.
OHAE12E5
6-11
For pleasant driving
Radio control panel and display
To tune the radio
E00709100640
E00708901231
Automatic tuning
After pressing the SEEK button, a receivable station will be automatically selected and reception of
the station will begin.
Manual tuning
The frequency changes every time the SEEK button is pressed. Press the button to select the desired
station.
To enter frequencies into the memory
E00716101186
123456-
FM (FM1/FM2/FM3) indicator
RADIO (FM/MW/LW selection) button
MEMORY (Memory selection) button
POWER (On-Off) button
SEEK
(Up-seek) button
SEEK
(Down-seek) button
Manual setting
You can assign a maximum of 18 stations in the
FM band (6 FM1, 6 FM2 and 6 FM3 stations) and
6 stations each in the MW and LW band to the
MEMORY button. (Stations already assigned to
the MEMORY button are replaced by any newly assigned stations.)
To listen to the radio
1. Press the POWER button until it beeps to
turn the audio system on and off. The system
turns on in the last mode used.
2. Press the RADIO button to select the desired
band.
3. Press the SEEK button to tune to a station, or
or
press the MEMORY button either
to recall a station memorised.
Follow the steps described below.
1. Press the SEEK button to tune to the frequency you wish to keep in the memory.
6-12
NOTE
l Disconnecting
the auxiliary battery terminal
erases all the radio frequencies stored in the
memory.
Automatic setting
With the method, all manually set stations in the
band currently selected for reception are replaced
with stations in the same band that are automatically selected in order of signal strength. The radio automatically selects 6 stations in the FM band (FM3
station only) and 6 stations each in the MW and
LW band.
Follow the steps described below.
1. With the radio mode selected, hold down the
RADIO button for 2 seconds or longer. The
6 stations with the best signal strength will automatically be assigned to the MEMORY button, with the lowest-frequency station being
assigned to the lowest-number.
2. When you subsequently press a MEMORY
button to select a channel number, the radio
will begin receiving the station assigned to
that number.
E00709000900
6
2. Press the MEMORY button either
or
until it beeps.
The sound will be momentarily interrupted
while the frequency is being entered into the
memory.
3. The preset memory setting is retrieved by
pressing the button and then releasing it within 2 seconds.
OHAE12E5
For pleasant driving
NOTE
l If you press the RADIO button for 2 seconds
or longer while tuning in the FM1 or FM2
band, the radio will automatically switch to
the FM3 band, where the automatic seeking/
storing will be activated.
Radio data system (RDS)
E00709200478
RDS uses PI (program identification) signal and
AF (alternative frequency) list transmitted in addition to the normal FM broadcasting programs, and
picks up the FM stations that are transmitting the
same program from the AF list and automatically
tunes to the station with the strongest signal intensity.
Therefore, you can continue listening to one program in, for example, a long distance driving without retuning to the other station transmitting the
same program when you are leaving the service
area of the currently receiving station.
The RDS radio also features the limited reception
of the program types, the break-in reception of the
traffic announcement to the EON (enhanced other
network) and emergency broadcast, and the limited/
unlimited reception of the regional programs.
AF (Alternative Frequencies) function
E00720900175
123456789101112-
SELECT knob
MEMORY button
RDS (Radio data system) indicator
PTY (Program type) indicator
TP (Traffic program identification) indicator
AF (Alternative Frequencies) indicator
REG (Regional program) indicator
CT (Clock time) indicator
Display
POWER (On-Off) switch
MENU button
TP (Traffic program)/PTY (Program type)
button
13- SEEK
(Up-step/Up-seek) button
14- SEEK
(Down-step/Down-seek) button
The AF function finds a station broadcasting the
same program and selects the station with the strongest signal of AF lists.
The AF function is turned on (with the AF indicator shown on the display) at all times unless you
manually switch it off.
The AF function can be turned ON and OFF.
Refer to “Function setup mode” on page 6-15.
The REG function can be turned ON and OFF.
Refer to “Function setup mode” on page 6-15.
PI (Program Identification) search function
E00721200289
When travelling long distance and the recalled preset station is weak, the radio searches another frequency broadcasting the same programming with
the same PI code in AF list.
If there are no frequencies broadcasting the same
programming, the radio searches a frequency broadcasting the regional programming. The radio succeeds in searching the regional programming, then
the display shows the REG indicator.
If the radio does not succeed in searching the regional programming, the radio returns to the recalled preset station.
The PI function can be turned ON and OFF.
Refer to “Function setup mode” on page 6-15.
6
NOTE
l While searching, the audio system is muted.
CT (Clock Time) function
E00721000160
The clock can be set automatically by using the signal from the local RDS stations. Refer to “Digital
clock” on page 6-31.
REG (Regional) function
E00721100057
REG function limits to receive the stations broadcasting regional programs.
OHAE12E5
Regional programming and regional networks are
organized differently depending on the country or
area (they may be changed according to the hour,
state, or broadcast area), so if you don’t want to receive the regional programs automatically, you can
set up REG ON not to receive regional programs.
The display shows “WAIT” or “SEARCH”.
PTY (Program type)
E00721300352
RDS broadcasts are classified according to program type (PTY) as follows. Use the SELECT
knob to select your desired PTY.
1. NEWS
2. AFFAIRS (Current affairs)
6-13
For pleasant driving
6
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
INFO (Information)
SPORT
EDUCATE (Education)
DRAMA
CULTURE
SCIENCE
VARIED
POP M (Pop music)
ROCK M (Rock music)
EASY M (Easy music)
LIGHT M (Light classics)
CLASSICS
OTHER M (Other music)
WEATHER (Weather information)
FINANCE
CHILDREN
SOCIAL
RELIGION
PHONE IN
TRAVEL
LEISURE
JAZZ
COUNTRY
NATION M (National music)
OLDIES
FOLK M (Folk music)
DOCUMENT
To search for a broadcast of desired program type:
1. Press the TP/PTY button.
2. Turn the SELECT knob to select your desired PTY.
3. Two seconds after a desired PTY has been selected, the radio will begin to search for a
broadcast of your selected PTY. During
search, the selected PTY on the display blinks.
4. When the radio picks up a station with your
desired PTY, the display will show the name
of the station.
6-14
2. Press the SEEK button to select a language.
NOTE
l If the SEEK button is pressed for more than
l
1 second, the radio will try to find out another broadcast of the same program type as currently selected.
If no station is found with your desired PTY,
the display will show “EMPTY” for about 5
seconds and the radio will return to the previous station.
How to enter PTYs in the memory
E00721400164
As many as 6 PTYs can be entered in the memory.
Follow the steps described below.
1. Turn the SELECT knob to tune the PTY to
be entered in the memory.
2. Press the MEMORY button for 2 seconds or
longer. The channel number to the entry into
the memory and the PTY are displayed.
3. The preset memory setting is retrieved by
pressing the MEMORY button and then releasing it within about 2 seconds.
To change the language of PTY display
NOTE
l After selecting a mode, you can leave the function setup mode by taking either of the following steps:
• Press the MENU button for at least 2 seconds.
• Make no entry for 10 seconds.
Traffic information
E00721500240
E00721600267
You can select your favourite language among English, French, German, Swedish, Spanish and Italian.
1. Press the MENU button for 2 seconds or longer to select the language of PTY display
mode.
Refer to “Function setup mode” on page
6-15.
The radio will automatically tune in to traffic information broadcasts while receiving FM broadcasts
or playing compact discs etc.
To select this function, follow the instructions below.
1. Press the TP/PTY button. The display will
show TP indicator. If the RDS data can be
read, the display will show RDS indicator. If
not, the display will show “NO RDS” for
about 5 seconds.
OHAE12E5
For pleasant driving
2. If the radio detects traffic information on either the station currently selected or another
station, the display will show “TRAF INF”
for 5 seconds followed by a 2-second indication of the frequency. Then, it will show the
name of the station broadcasting the traffic information to which you will listen. The volume level is set separately for listening to normal audio programs and for listening to traffic information. The volume level will therefore change automatically to that set when
traffic information was last received. When
the traffic information broadcast is over, the
radio will return to the previously received
program and to the corresponding volume level.
3. Press the TP/PTY button to return to the previous condition.
NOTE
l While “TP” is illuminated, the radio stops only at TP stations even if the SELECT knob is
turned.
TP (Traffic information Program) search function
E00721800201
The traffic information program standby function
is turned on (with the TP indicator shown on the display) and after about 45 seconds since the RDS indicator turns off due to weak signal or the tuning
station is changed over from a TP station to a station which does not broadcast traffic information,
and seeks out a TP station in all frequencies automatically.
Function setup mode
Emergency broadcasts
E00722500452
E00721700255
It is possible to change the following functions:
l AF
l REG*
l TP-S
l PI-S*
l Language of PTY display
1. Press the MENU button for 2 seconds or longer to select the function setup mode.
If an emergency broadcast is caught while receiving a FM broadcast or playing back a compact disc
with the electric motor switch in the “ACC” or
“ON” position, the display will show “ALARM”
and the emergency broadcast will interrupt the current program. The volume level is set separately
for listening to normal audio programs and for listening to emergency broadcasts. The volume level
will therefore change automatically to that set
when an emergency broadcast or traffic information broadcast was last received. When the emergency broadcast is over, the radio will return to the
previously received program and to the corresponding volume level.
2. Press the MENU button repeatedly to select
the mode you wish to change.
The order is: AF → REG* → TP-S → PI-S*
→ Language of PTY display → Function setup mode OFF.
3. Select the desired setting for each mode to be
turned ON and OFF as shown below.
The TP search function can be turned ON and OFF.
Refer to “Function setup mode” on page 6-15.
OHAE12E5
6-15
6
For pleasant driving
The setting will be shown on the display.
To listen to a CD
CD control panel and display
E00709602304
E00709501218
NOTE
l After selecting a mode, you can leave the function setup mode by taking either of the following steps:
• Press the MENU button for at least 2 seconds.
• Make no entry for 10 seconds.
6
123456789101112131415161718-
6-16
Disc-loading slot
Eject button
CD (CD mode changeover) button
TRACK
(Fast-forward/Track up) button
TRACK (Fast-reverse/Track down) button
CD indicator
SEL (Select mode) indicator
FOLDER indicator
TRACK indicator
Display
RDM/F-RDM indicator
RPT/F-RPT indicator
SELECT knob
POWER (On-Off) button/PAGE (Title
scroll) button
DISP (Title display) button
MENU button
SEEK
(Up-seek) button/ (Return) button
SEEK
(Down-seek) button/
(Select)
button
OHAE12E5
To set a disc
1. Press the POWER button until it beeps to
turn the audio system ON and OFF. The system turns on in the last mode used.
2. Insert disc with label facing up.
When a disc is inserted, the CD indicator
will come on and the CD player will begin
playing even if the radio is being used. The
CD player will also begin playing when the
CD button is pressed with a disc set in the
CD player or in the disc loading slot, even if
the radio is being used.
NOTE
l For
l
l
information concerning the adjustment
of volume and tone, refer to “To adjust the
volume” on page 6-10 and “To adjust the
tone” on page 6-11.
An 8 cm compact disc cannot be played on
this CD player.
For information concerning the handling of
the compact discs, refer to “Handling of compact discs” on page 6-29.
To eject a disc
When the eject button is pressed, the disc automatically stops and is ejected. The system automatically switches to radio mode.
NOTE
l If you do not remove an ejected disc before
15 seconds have elapsed, the disc will be reloaded.
For pleasant driving
To listen to a music CD
To listen to an MP3 CD
This CD player allows you to play MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3) files recorded on CD-ROMs, CD-Rs
(recordable CDs), and CD-RWs (rewritable CDs)
in ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2, Joliet, and Romeo formats. Each disc may have a maximum of 16 trees,
100 folders and 255 files. During MP3 playback,
the unit can display ID3 tag information. For information concerning ID3 tag, refer to “CD text and
MP3 title display” on page 6-19.
NOTE
l While
l
l
Push the CD button if a disc is already in the CD
player. The audio system will enter CD mode and
start playback. The track number and the playing
time will appear on the display. The tracks in the
disc will be played consecutively and continuously.
l
l
l
Push the CD button if a disc is already in the CD
player.
The display shows “READING”, then playback begins. The folder number, the track number and the
playing time will appear on the display.
OHAE12E5
l
l
l
listening to a disc on which CD-DA
(CD-Digital Audio) and MP3 files have both
been recorded, you can switch between reading of the CD-DA, reading of the MP3 files,
and the external audio input mode by pressing the CD button for 2 seconds or longer (until you hear a beep).
With a disc that contains both CD-DA and
MP3 files, the CD-DA files are automatically played first.
The playback sound quality differs depending on the encoding software and the bit rate.
For details, refer to the user manual of your
encoding software.
Depending on file/folder configurations on a
disc, it may take some time before playback
starts.
MP3 encoding software and writing software
are not supplied with this unit.
You may encounter trouble in playing an
MP3 or displaying the information of MP3
files recorded with certain writing software
or CD recorders (CD-R/RW drivers).
If you record too many folders or files other
than MP3 onto a disc, it may take some time
before playback starts.
This unit does not record MP3 files.
For information on CD-Rs/RWs, refer to
“Notes on CD-Rs/RWs” on page 6-29.
6-17
6
For pleasant driving
NOTE
File selection
CAUTION
l Attempting to play a file not in the MP3
format which has a “.mp3” file name may
produce noise from the speakers and
speaker damage, and can damage your
hearing.
Folder selection order/MP3 file playback order
(Example)
Root folder (root directory)
l Pressing the TRACK
button once during
the song will cause the CD player to restart
playback from the beginning of the song.
In the order
To fast-forward/fast-reverse the disc
To fast forward or fast reverse the disc, press the
TRACK
button or the TRACK
button.
Fast-forward
You can fast-forward the disc by pressing the
TRACK
button. While the button is kept pressed, the disc will be fast-forwarded.
Fast-reverse
You can fast reverse the disc by pressing the
TRACK
button. While the button is kept pressed, the disc will be fastreversed.
6
Tree 1
Folder selection
In the order
6-18
Tree 2
Tree 3
Tree 4
To find a file (MP3 CDs only)
Operate the following buttons or the SELECT
knob to select the desired file.
When this mode is activated by pressing the
button, the SEL indicator will be displayed in the display.
button
SELECT
knob
button
To select a desired track
You can select your desired track by using the
TRACK button.
NOTE
Track up
button repeatedly until the dePress the TRACK
sired track number appears on the display.
When listening to an MP3 CD, keep pressing the
button to continue to move up tracks.
l
Track down
button repeatedly until the dePress the TRACK
sired track number appears on the display.
When listening to an MP3 CD, keep pressing the
button to continue to move down tracks.
OHAE12E5
: Press the button to start this
mode or cancel the selection.
: Turn the knob to show the folder or file.
: Press the button to select the folder or file.
l If no operation is performed for 10 seconds
l
or more or another button is operated after
the SELECT knob has been turned, searching of the desired file is cancelled.
If no operation is performed for 5 seconds or
more after the file is displayed, playback
starts.
When the SEL indicator is not shown on the
display and the SELECT knob is operated,
the volume adjustment is effective.
To select the playing mode
E00765900013
1. Press the MENU button until you hear a beep.
For pleasant driving
2. Press the SEEK
select the mode.
/
button repeatedly to
Repeat tracks in the same folder (MP3 CDs only)
Select the F-REPEAT mode. Refer to “To select
the playing mode” on page 6-18.
The F-RPT indicator will come on and all tracks in
the currently selected folder will be played repeatedly.
l
To play tracks in random order
E00766100012
Random playback for a disc (music CDs only)
Select the RANDOM mode. Refer to “To select the
playing mode” on page 6-18.
The RDM indicator will come on and the tracks on
the disc will be played in a random sequence.
To play tracks in repeat
E00766000011
Repeat all tracks (normal playback)
Select the ALL REPEAT mode. Refer to “To select the playing mode” on page 6-18.
All tracks on the disc will be played repeatedly.
Repeat a track
Select the REPEAT mode. Refer to “To select the
playing mode” on page 6-18.
The RPT indicator will come on and repeat the
same track.
a disc that contains both CD-DA and
MP3 files, the repeat mode causes only files
of the same format (CD-DA only or MP3
files only) to be repeated.
E00725000689
With a disc that contains both CD-DA and
MP3 files, the repeat mode causes only files
of the same format (CD-DA only or MP3
files only) to be repeated.
(MP3 CDs only)
3. Press the MENU button until you hear a
beep. The selected mode will operate.
l With
CD text and MP3 title display
NOTE
(MP3 CDs only)
NOTE
Random playback for a folder (MP3 CDs only)
Select the F-RANDOM mode. Refer to “To select
the playing mode” on page 6-18.
The F-RDM indicator will come on and the tracks
on the currently selected folder will be played in a
random sequence.
Random playback for all folders on a disc (MP3
CDs only)
Select the RANDOM mode. Refer to “To select the
playing mode” on page 6-18.
The RDM indicator will come on and the files
from all the folders on the disc will be played in random sequence.
OHAE12E5
This audio system can display CD text and MP3 titles, including ID3 tag information.
CD text
The audio system can display disc and track titles
for discs with converted disc and track title information. Press the DISP button repeatedly to make selections in the following sequence: disc name →
track name → normal display mode.
NOTE
l The display can show up to 11 characters. If
l
l
a disc name or track name has more than 11
characters, press the PAGE button to view
the next 11 characters.
When there is no title information to be displayed, the display shows “NO TITLE”.
Characters that the audio system cannot display are shown as “ ”.
MP3 title
The audio system can display folder and track titles
for discs with converted folder and track information. Press the DISP button repeatedly to make selections in the following sequence: folder name →
track name → normal display mode.
ID3 tag information
The audio system can display ID3 tag information
for files that have been recorded with ID3 tag information.
6-19
6
For pleasant driving
1. Press the DISP button for 2 seconds or longer to switch to the ID3 tag information.
“TAG” will appear on the display.
2. Press the DISP button repeatedly to make selections in the following sequence: album
name → track name → artist name → normal display mode.
NOTE
l To
l
l
l
l
return from ID3 tag information to the
folder name, press the DISP button again for
2 seconds or longer.
When there is no title information to be displayed, the display shows “NO TITLE”.
The display can show up to 11 characters. If
a folder name, track name, or item of ID3 tag
information has more than 11 characters,
press the PAGE button to view the next 11
characters.
Folder names, track names and ID3 tag information can each be displayed up to a length
of 32 characters.
Characters that the audio system cannot display are shown as “ ”.
To play tracks from USB device*
iPod control panel and display
E00756200241
E00756100211
You can connect your iPod or USB memory device
to the USB input terminal and play music files stored in the iPod or USB memory device.
See the following section for the types of connectable devices and supported files.
Refer to “Types of connectable devices and supported file specifications” on page 6-34.
See the following sections for the connecting methods, “How to connect an iPod” on page 6-34 and
“How to connect a USB memory device” on page
6-33.
NOTE
lA
l
file protected by copyright may not be
able to playback.
It is recommended to adjust the equalizer of
the connected device to 0 db or neutral.
6
12345678910111213141516-
6-20
OHAE12E5
CD (CD mode changeover) button
TRACK
(Fast-forward/Track up) button
TRACK (Fast-reverse/Track down) button
iPod indicator
(USB device active) indicator
SEL (Select mode) indicator
TRACK indicator
Display
RDM/F-RDM indicator
RPT/F-RPT indicator
SELECT knob
POWER (On-Off) button/PAGE (Title
scroll) button
DISP (Title display) button
MENU button
SEEK
(Up-seek) button/ (Return) button
SEEK
(Down-seek) button/
(Select)
button
For pleasant driving
To play from an iPod
E00756300385
1. Press the POWER button to turn on the audio system. The system turns on in the last
mode used.
2. Connect your iPod to the USB input terminal.
Refer to “How to connect an iPod” on page
6-34.
3. Press the CD button to switch to the iPod
mode. The mode changes every time the CD
button is pressed.
CD mode → iPod mode → CD mode
The iPod indicator is illuminated and then
the iPod mode will be activated.
4. Once the device is selected, playback starts
and
indicator appears on the display.
To select a desired track
E00756500101
Track up
button repeatedly until the dePress the TRACK
sired track number appears on the display.
Track down
Press the TRACK
button repeatedly until the desired track number appears on the display.
NOTE
l Depending on the condition of your iPod, it
may take a longer time before the playback
starts.
5. To stop the playback, change over to a different mode.
NOTE
l Buttons
on the iPod are disabled while the
iPod is connected to the audio system.
To adjust the volume and tone, refer to “To
adjust the volume” and “To adjust the tone”.
button once during
the song will cause the audio system to restart playback from the beginning of the song.
To find a track from the iPod menu
E00756600199
You can select desired tracks from the “Playlists”,
“Artists”, “Albums” or “Songs” menus on your iPod.
Operate the following buttons or knob to select desired tracks.
butWhen this mode is activated by pressing the
ton, the SEL indicator will be displayed in the display.
button
To fast-forward/reverse the track
E00756400126
Fast-forward
To fast-forward the current track, press the
TRACK
button. While the button is pressed,
the track will be fast-forwarded.
NOTE
l If no operation is performed for 10 seconds
l
l
l
or more or other button is operated after the
SELECT knob has been pressed, searching
of the desired tracks is cancelled.
If no operation is performed for 5 seconds or
more after the track is displayed, playback
starts.
button is pressed when the category
If the
is delected, playback of the first tracks in the
selected category starts.
When the SEL indicator is not shown on the
display and the SELECT knob is operated,
the volume adjustment is effective.
To select the playing mode
l Pressing the TRACK
NOTE
l
Fast-reverse
To fast-reverse the current track, press the TRACK
button. While the button is pressed, the track
will be fast-reversed.
E00769200014
1. Press and hold the MENU button until you
hear a beep.
2. Press the MENU button repeatedly to select
the playing mode you wish to change to. The
order is: REPEAT mode → SHUFFLE mode
→ mode off.
3. Press the SEEK
/
button repeatedly to
select the mode.
REPEAT mode
6
SHUFFLE mode
: Press the button to start this
mode or cancel the selection.
SELECT knob : Turn the knob to show the
menu or category or track.
button
: Press the button to select the
menu or category or track.
OHAE12E5
6-21
For pleasant driving
4. Press the MENU button until you hear a
beep. The selected mode will operate.
NOTE
l When
the SHUFFLE OFF mode is selected
in the SHUFFLE mode, the random playback is cancelled.
To switch the display
E00757100117
NOTE
E00769300015
Repeat all tracks (normal playback)
Select the ALL REPEAT mode. Refer to “To select the playing mode” on page 6-21.
All tracks will be played repeatedly.
Repeat a track
Select the REPEAT mode. Refer to “To select the
playing mode” on page 6-21.
The RPT indicator will come on and repeat the
same track.
l
l
at once. If the title is cut off in the middle,
press the PAGE button (5). The next characters are displayed every time this button is
pressed.
If no title is stored, “NO TITLE” is shown in
the display.
Characters that cannot be displayed are substituted by “ ”.
To play tracks in random order
E00756900105
Random playback
Select the S-SHUFFLE mode, and the RDM indicator will come on. Refer to “To select the playing
mode” on page 6-21.
The iPod randomly selects tracks from the current
category and plays the selected tracks.
12345678910111213141516-
Random playback for each album
Select the A-SHUFFLE mode, and the F-RDM indicator will come on. Refer to “To select the playing mode” on page 6-21.
The iPod randomly selects tracks in the album
from the current category and play the selected
tracks.
6-22
E00758100244
l Up to 11 characters are shown in the display
To play tracks in repeat
6
USB control panel and display
The display changes as follows every time the
DISP button is pressed during playback.
Album title → Track name → Artist name → Normal display
17-
OHAE12E5
CD (CD mode changeover) button
TRACK
(Fast-forward/Track up) button
TRACK (Fast-reverse/Track down) button
(USB device active) indicator
USB indicator
FOLDER indicator
SEL (Select mode) indicator
TRACK indicator
Display
RDM/F-RDM indicator
RPT/F-RPT indicator
SELECT knob
POWER (On-Off) button/PAGE (Title
scroll) button
DISP (Title display) button
MENU button
SEEK
(Up-seek) button/ (Return) button
SEEK
(Down-seek) button/
(Select)
button
For pleasant driving
To play from a USB memory device
E00762500379
1. Press the POWER button to turn on the audio system. The system turns on in the last
mode used.
2. Connect your USB memory device to the
USB input terminal.
Refer to “How to connect a USB memory device” on page 6-33.
3. Press the CD button to switch to the USB
mode. The mode changes as follows every
time the CD button is pressed.
CD mode → USB mode → CD mode
The USB indicator is illuminated and then
the USB mode will be activated.
4. Once the device is selected, playback starts
and the indicator appears on the display.
Folder selection order/file playback order (example)
The folder and file hierarchy in the USB memory
device is shown below.
NOTE
l If a file protected by copyrights is played, the
file will be skipped.
To fast-forward/reverse the file
E00758400104
Root folder (Root directory)
Fast-forward
To fast-forward the current file, press the TRACK
button. While the button is pressed, the file will
be fast-forwarded.
Fast-reverse
To fast-reverse the current file, press the TRACK
button. While the button is pressed, the file will
be fast-reversed.
To select a file
E00758500105
NOTE
l Depending on the condition of your USB de-
vice, it may take a longer time before the playback starts.
5. To stop the playback, change over to a different mode.
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
adjust the volume” and “To adjust the tone”.
In the order
NOTE
l Pressing the TRACK
button once during
the song will cause the audio system to restart playback from the beginning of the song.
File selection
In the order
Supported compressed music files
File up
Press the TRACK
button repeatedly until the desired file number appears on the display.
File down
Press the TRACK
button repeatedly until the desired file number appears on the display.
Folder selection
NOTE
l To adjust the volume and tone, refer to “To
Level 4
E00758300376
This audio can play MP3, WMA, AAC and WAV
files recorded in a USB memory device. This audio
supports up to 65,535 files in 700 folders on 8 levels.
To find a file
E00758600324
Operate the following buttons or the SELECT
knob to select the desired file.
butWhen this mode is activated by pressing the
ton, the SEL indicator will be displayed in the display.
OHAE12E5
6-23
6
For pleasant driving
button
:
Press the button to start this
mode or cancel the selection.
SELECT knob
: Turn the knob to show the folder or file.
button
: Press the button to select the
folder or file.
2. Press the SEEK
select the mode.
/
button repeatedly to
Repeat tracks in the same folder
Select the F-REPEAT mode. Refer to “To select
the playing mode” on page 6-24.
The F-RPT indicator will come on and all tracks in
the currently selected folder will be played repeatedly.
To play tracks in random order
E00769600018
NOTE
Random playback for a folder
Select the F-RANDOM mode. Refer to “To select
the playing mode” on page 6-24.
The F-RDM indicator will come on and the tracks
on the currently selected folder will be played in a
random sequence.
l If no operation is performed for 10 seconds
l
l
or more or another button is operated after
the SELECT knob has been turned, searching of the desired file is cancelled.
If no operation is performed for 5 seconds or
more after the file is displayed, playback
starts.
When the SEL indicator is not shown on the
display and the SELECT knob is operated,
the volume adjustment is effective.
To select the playing mode
E00769400016
1. Press the MENU button until you hear a beep.
3. Press the MENU button until you hear a
beep. The selected mode will operate.
E00769500017
Repeat all tracks (normal playback)
Select the ALL REPEAT mode. Refer to “To select the playing mode” on page 6-24.
All tracks will be played repeatedly.
Repeat a track
Select the REPEAT mode. Refer to “To select the
playing mode” on page 6-24.
The RPT indicator will come on and repeat the
same track.
6-24
To switch the display
E00759300201
To play tracks in repeat
6
Random playback for all folders
Select the RANDOM mode. Refer to “To select the
playing mode” on page 6-24.
The RDM indicator will come on and the files
from all the folders will be played in random sequence.
OHAE12E5
The display changes as follows every time the
DISP button is pressed during playback.
Folder title → File title → Normal display
ID3 tag information
1. Press and hold the DISP button until you
hear a beep to show “TAG” in the display.
2. The display changes as follows every time
the DISP button is pressed briefly:
Album title → Track title → Artist name →
Normal display
For pleasant driving
NOTE
l Press
l
l
l
and hold the DISP button again until
you hear a beep, and the tag information display returns to the folder title display.
Up to 11 characters are shown in the display
at once. If the title is cut off in the middle,
press the PAGE button. The next characters
are displayed every time this button is pressed.
If no title is stored, “NO TITLE” is shown in
the display.
Characters that cannot be displayed are substituted by “ ”.
6
OHAE12E5
6-25
For pleasant driving
Error codes
E00710101328
If an error code appears in the display, take action in accordance with the table below.
Error display
Problem
Item
Repair
NO DISC
No disc inserted
Disc is not in CD player.
CHECK DISC
Focus error
Disc is not loaded correctly, or condensation on Insert disc with label facing up.
disc.
Remove moisture from disc.
DISC ERROR
Disc error
Disc is dirty, scratched, or deformed; or exces- Clean or replace disc. Retry when vibrasive vehicle vibration.
tions stop.
INTERNAL E
Mechanism error
Loading or eject error. Pick-up is out of position.
Eject disc and reload. If disc will not eject,
have the equipment inspected.
HEAT ERROR
Inside of audio system is hot.
Internal protection against high temperatures.
Allow radio to cool by waiting about 30 minutes.
ERROR DC
DC offset output voltage
Foreign material is inside the radio or amplifier.
Consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
ERROR
Communication error between external device
Communication or power supply
Consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorand audio equipment.
error
ized Service Point.
Power supply error of external device.
6
6-26
OHAE12E5
Insert disc.
For pleasant driving
Error codes (iPod)
E00763500060
If an error code appears in the display, take action in accordance with the table below.
Error display
Item
Repair
NO SONG
There are no playable music files.
Record music files in the iPod.
VER ERROR (Blink)
The iPod or its software cannot be recognized.
Connect a supported iPod.
USB BUS PWR (Blink)
An overcurrent or other power-supply error has occurred.
Remove the iPod.
Have the vehicle inspected at a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Authorized Service Point.
If the iPod indicator illuminates, the iPod cannot be authenReconnect the iPod.
ticated.
CONNECT RETRY (Blink)
Reconnect the iPod correctly.
If the iPod indicator goes out, it shows the USB communiIf this error is displayed again, have the vehicle inspected at
cation error.
a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
6
OHAE12E5
6-27
For pleasant driving
Error codes (USB memory device)
E00763600061
If an error code appears in the display, take action in accordance with the table below.
Error display
Item
Repair
U NO SONG
There are no playable music files.
Record music files in the format supported by the USB memory device.
U FILE ERROR (Blink)
The file cannot be played.
The file is protected by copyrights, etc. An error is displayed for several seconds, and then the next playable file
is played automatically.
UNSUPPORTED DEVICE (Blink)
The USB memory device cannot be recognized.
Remove the USB memory device.
UNSUPPORTED FORMAT (Blink)
The USB memory device format cannot be recognized.
Remove the USB memory device.
USB BUS PWR (Blink)
An overcurrent or other power-supply error has occurred.
Remove the USB memory device.
Have the vehicle inspected at a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Authorized Service Point.
U LSI ERROR (Blink)
Internal device errors
Have the vehicle inspected at a MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Authorized Service Point.
U CONNECT RETRY (Blink)
USB communication error
Reconnect the USB memory device correctly.
If this error is displayed again, have the vehicle inspected at
a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
6
6-28
OHAE12E5
For pleasant driving
Handling of compact discs
l When
E00723000441
l Use only the type of compact discs that have
the mark shown in the illustration below.
(Playback of CD-R or CD-RW discs may
cause problems.)
l
l
l
l
l The use of special shaped, damaged compact
discs (like cracked discs) or low-quality compact discs (like warped discs or burrs on the
discs) such as those shown will damage the
CD player.
l In the following circumstances, moisture can
form on discs and inside the audio system,
preventing normal operation.
• When there is high humidity (for example, when it is raining).
• When the temperature suddenly rises,
such as right after the heater is turned on
in cold weather.
l
In this case, wait until the moisture has
had time to dry out.
When the CD player is subjected to violent vibrations, such as during off-road driving, the
tracking may not work.
OHAE12E5
storing compact discs, always store
them in their separate cases. Never place compact discs in direct sunlight, or in any place
where the temperature or humidity is high.
Never touch the flat surface of the disc without a label. This will damage the disc surface
and could affect the sound quality. When handling a compact disc, always hold it by the
outer edge and the centre hole.
To clean a disc, use a soft, clean, dry cloth.
Wipe directly from the centre hole towards
the outer edge. Do not wipe in a circle. Never use any chemicals such as benzine, paint
thinner, a disc spray cleaner, or an anti-static
agent on the disc.
Do not use a ball point pen, felt pen, pencil,
etc. to write on the label surface of the disc.
Do not put additional labels (A) or stickers
(B) on compact discs. Also, do not use any
compact disc on which a label or sticker has
started to peel off or any compact disc that
has stickiness or other contamination left by
a peeled-off label or sticker. If you use such
a compact disc, the CD player may stop working properly and you may not be able to eject
the compact disc.
Notes on CD-Rs/RWs
E00725100039
l You
l
may have trouble playing back some
CD-R/RW discs recorded on CD recorders
(CD-R/RW drives), either due to their recording characteristics or dirt, fingerprints,
scratches, etc. on the disc surface.
CD-R/RW discs are less resistant to high temperatures and high humidity than ordinary music CDs. Leaving them inside a vehicle for extended periods may damage them and make
playback impossible.
6-29
6
For pleasant driving
Antenna
l The
l
l
l
unit may not successfully play back a
CD-R/RW that was made by the combination of writing software, a CD recorder
(CD-R/RW drive) and a disc if they are incompatible with one another.
This player cannot play the CD-R/RW discs
if the session is not closed.
This player cannot play CD-R/RW discs
which contain other than CD-DA or MP3 data (Video CD, etc.).
Be sure to observe the handling instructions
for the CD-R/RW disc.
NOTE
E00710500673
When listening to the radio, fully raise the antenna
up.
WARNING
l
Operating the CD player in a manner other than specifically instructed herein may
result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Do not remove the cover and attempt to
repair the CD player by yourself. There
are no user serviceable parts inside. In
case of malfunction, we recommend you
to have it checked.
To remove
Turn the pole (A) anticlockwise.
To install
Screw the pole (A) clockwise into the base (B) until it is securely retained.
6
6-30
OHAE12E5
l Be sure to remove the roof antenna in the fol-
lowing cases:
• When entering a place with low clearance.
• When using an automatic car wash.
• When placing a car cover over the vehicle.
For pleasant driving
Digital clock*
l During
E00711800527
To display the clock
Press the
button to switch the clock mode. To
exit the clock mode, press the
button.
automatic tuning in the radio mode,
the automatic tuning will stop and the clock
mode will be displayed when the
button
is pressed. In addition, the radio will return
to the previous station before automatic tuning began.
To adjust the clock
CD player mode
Clock mode
Automatic mode and manual mode is available for
digital clock adjustment.
Select the automatic mode or the manual mode by
performing the following operations:
1. Press the POWER button (A) to turn ON the
audio system.
2. Enter the function setup mode by pressing
button for 2 seconds or longer.
the
CT ON-
Automatic mode
CT OFF-
Manual mode
NOTE
l After selecting a mode, you can leave the function setup mode by taking either of the following steps:
• Press the
button for at least 2 seconds.
• Make no entry for 7 seconds.
A-
(Clock) button
6
NOTE
l While the clock mode is selected, the display
l
will switch to the applicable operation display whenever the CD player or radio is operated. Then, if no entries are made for 7 seconds, the display will automatically return to
the clock mode.
While the clock mode is selected, the display
will not switch to the applicable operation display when the CD is fast-forwarded or fastreversed.
A- POWER (On-Off) button
B(Clock) button
3. Select the desired setting for each mode to be
turned ON and OFF.
OHAE12E5
6-31
For pleasant driving
Automatic mode
Manual mode
The automatic adjustment mode can set the local
time automatically by using the signal from local
RDS stations. In this mode, the CT indicator (A) is
shown in the display. Refer to “Radio data system
(RDS)” on page 6-13.
The manual mode is also available in case the automatic mode shows the incorrect time when the adjacent local RDS stations are located in a different
time zone. Refer to “Radio data system (RDS)” on
page 6-13.
NOTE
A(Clock) button
B- SEEK
(clock adjustment up) button
C- SEEK
(clock adjustment down) button
1. Press and hold the
button and the clock
display flashes.
2. Press the SEEK button to adjust the “hours”
digit.
If you keep pressing the button, fast-forward
begins.
3. When the “hours” digit is adjusted, press the
clock button to flash the “minutes” digit.
Press the SEEK button to adjust the “minutes” digit.
If you keep pressing the button, fast-forward
begins.
4. When the time is set, press the clock button
to stop the clock display from flashing.
6
6-32
OHAE12E5
l Reset the time after the auxiliary battery terminals are disconnected and reconnected.
l Seconds do not appear in the clock display,
but after adjusting the “minutes” setting, the
clock begins to operate from 0 seconds.
For pleasant driving
USB input terminal*
Link System*
E00764500139
E00761900015
The Link System takes overall control of the devices connected via the USB input terminal allowing
the connected devices to be operated by using the
switches in the vehicle.
See the following section for details on how to operate.
You can connect your USB memory device or
iPod* to play music files stored in the USB memory device or iPod.
The following explains how to connect and remove
a USB memory device or iPod.
Refer to the following sections for details on how
to play music files:
Refer to “To play tracks from USB device” on
page 6-20.
*: “iPod” is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. in
the United States and other countries.
Refer to “USB input terminal” on page 6-33.
Refer to “To play tracks from USB device” on
page 6-20.
3. Connect a commercially available USB connector cable (C) to the USB memory device
(B).
How to connect a USB memory device
E00762000316
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn the
electric motor switch to the “LOCK” position.
2. Open the USB input terminal cover (A).
4. Connect the USB connector cable (C) to the
USB input terminal (D).
6
OHAE12E5
6-33
For pleasant driving
2. Open the USB input terminal cover (A).
WARNING
4. Connect the Dock connector (C) to the USB
input terminal (D).
l Place
the USB memory device and the
USB connector cable so as not to interfere with driving.
NOTE
l Do
not connect the USB memory device to
the USB input terminal directly.
The USB memory device may be damaged.
5. To remove the USB connector cable, turn the
electric motor switch to the “LOCK” position first and perform the installation steps in
reverse.
WARNING
How to connect an iPod
l
E00762100258
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn the
electric motor switch to the “LOCK” position.
3. Connect the Dock connector (C) to the iPod
(B).
6
Place the iPod and the USB connector cable so as not to interfere with driving.
5. To remove the Dock connector, turn the electric motor switch to the “LOCK” position
first and perform the installation steps in reverse.
Types of connectable devices and supported file specifications
E00762200015
Device types
E00762300250
Devices of the following types can be connected.
NOTE
l Use
a genuine Dock connector from Apple
Inc.
6-34
OHAE12E5
For pleasant driving
Model name
Condition
USB memory device
Storage capacity of 256
Mbytes or more
iPod touch*
F/W Ver.1.1.1 or later
iPod
classic*
iPod (fifth generation)*
l Do
not connect to the USB input terminal
any device (hard disk, card reader, memory
reader, etc.) other than the connectable devices specified in the previous section. The device and/or data may be damaged. If any of
these devices was connected by mistake, remove it after turning the electric motor
switch to the “LOCK” position.
F/W Ver.1.0 or later
F/W Ver.1.2.2 or later
iPod nano (fifth generaF/W Ver.1.2 or later
tion)*
E00762400017
You can play music files of the following specifications that are saved in a USB memory device or other device supporting mass storage class.
Models other than USB Digital audio player supmemory devices and porting mass storage
iPods
class
Item
Condition
File format
MP3,
WAV
“iPod touch,” “iPod classic,” “iPod” and “iPod
nano” are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. in
the United States and other countries.
NOTE
l
l
l
l
l
Depending on the type of the USB memory
device or other device connected, the connected device may not function properly or the
available functions may be limited.
Use the iPod whose firmware has been updated to the latest version.
You can charge your iPod by connecting it to
the USB input terminal when the electric motor switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
Do not keep your USB memory device or
iPod in your vehicle.
It is recommended that you back up files in
case of data damage.
E00711201209
File specifications
iPod nano (second genF/W Ver.1.1.2 or later
eration)*
*:
Sun visors
Maximum number of
levels (including the Level 8
root)
Number of folders
700
Number of files
65,535
WMA,
AAC,
1- To eliminate front glare
2- To eliminate side glare
Vanity mirror
E00731900247
A vanity mirror is fitted to the back of the sun visor.
6
OHAE12E5
6-35
For pleasant driving
Card holder
E00732000232
Cards can be slipped into the holder (A) on the
back of the sun visor.
Accessory socket
6
CAUTION
l Be sure to use a “plug-in” type accessory
operating at 12 V and at 120 W or less.
6-36
CAUTION
E00711601388
To use a plug-in type accessory, open the lid, and
insert the plug in the accessory socket.
The accessory socket can be used while the electric
motor switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
OHAE12E5
l Long
l
use of the electric appliance when
the ready indicator is not illuminated
may run down the auxiliary battery.
When the accessory socket is not in use,
be sure to close the lid, because the socket
might become clogged by foreign material and be short-circuited.
For pleasant driving
Interior lamps
Map & room lamps (front)
• When the electric motor switch is
turned to the “ON” position.
• When the remote control switch of
the keyless entry system is operated.
• When any of the doors or the tailgate
is opened after all doors and the tailgate are closed.
E00717300609
E00712001220
Room lamp
NOTE
l When
l
1- Room lamp (rear)
2- Map & room lamps (front)
NOTE
l If you leave the lamps on when the ready indicator is not illuminated, you will run down
the auxiliary battery.
Before you leave the vehicle, make sure that
the lamps are turned off.
l
1- (DOOR)
l The lamp illuminates when a door or the
tailgate is opened. It goes off about 15 seconds after the door or tailgate is closed
(delayed off function).
However, the lamp goes off immediately
in the following cases:
• When the electric motor switch is
turned to the “ON” position.
• When the central door lock function
is used to lock the vehicle.
• When the remote control switch of
the keyless entry system is used to
lock the vehicle.
l If the lamp is left switched on with the
electric motor switch in the “LOCK” or
“ACC” position and a door or the tailgate
is opened, it goes off automatically after
approximately 30 minutes.
The lamp will illuminate again after it automatically goes off in the following cases:
OHAE12E5
the key is removed while the doors
and tailgate are closed, the lamp is illuminated and after about 15 seconds it goes off.
The time until the lamp goes off (delayed
off) can be adjusted. For details, please consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
Service Point.
The auto cut-out function can be deactivated.
For details, please consult a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
2The lamp stays off regardless of whether the
doors and tailgate are open or closed.
6
6-37
For pleasant driving
2- (•)
Map lamps
l The lamp illuminates when a door or the
E00765200058
Regardless of the position of the room lamp
switch, when the lens is pressed, the lamp on the
side that was pressed will illuminate. Press the lens
again to turn off the lamp.
tailgate is opened. It goes off about 15 seconds after the door or tailgate is closed
(delayed off function).
However, the lamp goes off immediately
in the following cases:
• When the electric motor switch is
turned to the “ON” position.
• When the central door lock function
is used to lock the vehicle.
• When the remote control switch of
the keyless entry system is used to
lock the vehicle.
l If
the lamp is left switched on with the
electric motor switch in the “LOCK” or
“ACC” position and a door or the tailgate
is opened, it goes off automatically after
approximately 30 minutes.
The lamp will illuminate again after it automatically goes off in the following cases:
• When the electric motor switch is
turned to the “ON” position.
• When the remote control switch of
the keyless entry system is operated.
• When any of the doors or the tailgate
is opened after all doors and the tailgate are closed.
Room lamp (rear)
E00712300385
6
NOTE
l When
l
1- (ON)
The lamp illuminates regardless of whether
the doors and tailgate are open or closed.
6-38
the key is removed while the doors
and tailgate are closed, the lamp is illuminated and after about 15 seconds it goes off.
The time until the lamp goes off (delayed
off) can be adjusted. For details, please consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
Service Point.
OHAE12E5
l The auto cut-out function cannot be operated
when the room lamp switch is in the “ON”
position.
Also, this function can be deactivated. For details, please consult a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
3- (OFF)
The lamp goes off regardless of whether the
doors and tailgate are open or closed.
For pleasant driving
Storage spaces
Glove box
E00713101752
E00726200242
To open, pull the lever (A).
CAUTION
l
l
Never leave lighters, cans of carbonated
drink, and spectacles in the cabin when
parking the vehicle in hot sunshine. The
cabin will become extremely hot, so lighters and other flammable items may catch
fire and unopened drink cans (including
soft drink or beer cans) may rupture. Also, spectacles with plastic lenses or materials could deform or crack.
Keep the lids of storage spaces closed
while driving the vehicle. A lid or the contents of a storage space could otherwise
cause injuries.
Secret box (RHD vehicles only)
E00724900056
The secret box is located on the upper part of the
glove box.
To use the box, open the lid.
Card holder
E00765500019
There is a card holder inside the glove box.
NOTE
l When leaving your vehicle, do not leave valuables in the storage spaces.
6
1- Secret box (RHD vehicles only)
2- Glove box
OHAE12E5
6-39
For pleasant driving
Cup holder
E00714500974
Type 2
Tip the cup holder towards you to use it.
Type 1
The cup holder is located in front of the floor console.
CAUTION
l
l
RHD vehicles
Do not drink beverages while driving.
This is distracting and could cause an accident.
Beverages can be spilled owing to vibration or other movement during vehicle operation. Be careful not to get scalded by a
hot beverage if it is spilled.
LHD vehicles
Type 1
The cup holder is located behind the parking brake
lever.
NOTE
l When
l
l
not using the holder, push the holder
to stow it away.
Do not put your hand on the cup holder
while getting in or out of the vehicle. The
cup holder could break.
Never place anything other than a cup or
drink can in the cup holder.
Type 2 (Passenger’s side only)
To use the cup holder, pull it out.
6
NOTE
l When
not using the holder, push the holder
to stow it away.
6-40
OHAE12E5
For pleasant driving
Assist grips
E00732800272
The assist grips (located above the doors on the
headliner) are not designed to support body weight.
They are intended for use only while seated in the
vehicle.
CAUTION
l Do not use the assist grips when getting into or out of the vehicle. The assist grips
could detach causing you to fall.
6
OHAE12E5
6-41
OHAE12E5
For emergencies
If the vehicle breaks down............................................................7-02
Emergency starting.......................................................................7-02
Tyre repair kit...............................................................................7-04
Towing..........................................................................................7-10
Operation under adverse driving conditions.................................7-12
7
OHAE12E5
For emergencies
If the vehicle breaks down
E00800502750
If the vehicle breaks down on the road, move it to
the shoulder and use the hazard warning flashers and/
or the warning triangle etc.
Refer to “Hazard warning flasher switch” on page
4-15.
If the electric motor unit cannot be started because
the auxiliary battery is weak or dead, the battery
from another vehicle can be used with jumper cables to start the electric motor unit.
WARNING
l If you are not able to safely assess the ve-
hicle due to vehicle damage, do not touch
the vehicle. Leave the vehicle and contact
a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
Service Point or another specialist and
convey that this is an electric vehicle first.
If the ready indicator goes out while
driving
7
Emergency starting
E00800101355
Vehicle operation and control are affected if the
ready indicator goes out while driving. Before moving the vehicle to a safe area, be aware of the following:
l The brake booster may become inoperative
and the pedal effort will increase. Press
down the brake pedal harder than usual.
l The power steering system may not operate,
the steering wheel feels heavy when turning it.
WARNING
l To start the electric motor unit by using
jumper cables from another vehicle, perform the correct procedures according to
the instruction below. Incorrect procedures could result in a fire or explosion
or damage to the vehicles.
CAUTION
l The electric motor unit cannot be started
by pulling or pushing the vehicle.
l Always wear protective eye goggles when
working near the battery.
l Keep the battery out of the reach of chil-
2. Turn off all lamps, heater and other electrical
loads.
3. Set the parking brake firmly on your vehicle
and move the selector lever into the “P” position.
4. Set the parking brake firmly on another vehicle. Put an A/T in “P” (PARK) or a M/T in
“N” (Neutral).
5. Turn the ignition switch or the electric motor
switch to the “LOCK” position.
WARNING
l Perform
step 5 on both vehicles beforehand.
Make sure that the cables or your clothes
cannot be caught by the fan or drive belt.
Personal injury could result.
6. Remove the battery cover, and then make
sure auxiliary battery electrolyte is at the proper level.
Refer to “Auxiliary battery” on page 8-12.
dren.
1. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper
cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles
aren’t touching each other.
CAUTION
WARNING
l If
electrolyte fluid is not visible, or appears to be frozen, Do Not Attempt Jump
Starting!
A battery might rupture or explode if the
temperature is below the freezing point
or if it is not filled to the proper level.
l Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12volt battery.
If the other system isn’t 12-volt, shorting
can damage both vehicles.
7-02
OHAE12E5
7. Connect one end of one jumper cable to the
positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery (A), and the other end to the positive (+)
terminal of the booster battery (B).
For emergencies
Connect one end of the other jumper cable to
the negative (-) terminal of the booster battery, and the other end to the designated location of the vehicle with the discharged battery at the point farthest from the battery.
WARNING
l When
connecting the jumper cables, do
not connect the positive (+) cable to the
negative (-) terminal. Otherwise sparks
might cause explosion of the battery.
LHD
CAUTION
l
l
RHD
l
WARNING
Take care not to get the jumper cable
caught in the cooling fan or other rotating part in the bonnet room or engine compartment.
Use the proper cables suitable for the battery size to prevent overheating of the cables.
Check the jumper cables for damage and
corrosion before use.
8. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the electric motor unit in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
l Make sure you observe the following orl
der when connecting the cables: → →
→
Make sure you make connection
to the
correct designated location (as shown in
the illustration). If the connection is made
directly to the negative (-) side of the discharged battery, flammable gases generated from the battery might catch fire
and explode.
9. Check that the ready indicator illuminates.
[When the ready indicator illuminates]
Stop the engine of another vehicle, disconnect the cables in the reverse order and
charge the auxiliary battery for more than 30
minutes.
After the auxiliary battery is charged, continue the process from step 16.
[When the ready indicator does not illuminate]
Both the auxiliary battery and the traction battery have gone flat at the same time.
Charge the auxiliary battery and the traction
battery by the following procedures (from
steps 10 to 14).
10. Keep connecting the jumper cable to each vehicle, turn the electric motor switch of your
vehicle to the “LOCK” position.
NOTE
l The
jumper cable needs to be connected to
the auxiliary battery when you start charging
the traction battery because the on board
charger etc. operate with a power source of
auxiliary battery.
11. Charge the traction battery by regular charging. (Refer to “Regular charging” on page
1-06.)
12. When the charging indicator on the instrument cluster is illuminated, stop the engine
of another vehicle, disconnect the cables in
the reverse order.
OHAE12E5
7-03
7
For emergencies
Tyre repair kit
WARNING
l Do not charge the auxiliary battery using
l
NOTE
l When the regular charge connector is connecl
7
ted to the charge port, the charging indicator
is blinking. When charging is started, the
charging indicator is illuminated.
The auxiliary battery is automatically charged while charging the traction battery.
13. Charge the traction battery for more than 1
hour.
14. Disconnect the charging cable.
(Refer to “Regular charging” on page 1-06.)
15. Turn the electric motor switch to the
“START” position, make sure that the ready
indicator on the instrument cluster is illuminated.
If the ready indicator does not illuminate, perform the procedure again from step 7.
If charging cannot be performed, consult a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
Point.
16. Refit the battery cover. (Refer to “Auxiliary
battery” on page 8-12.)
7-04
l
l
l
an external battery charger while the auxiliary battery is mounted in the vehicle.
Doing so could cause the auxiliary battery to catch fire and explode and could
result in damage to the vehicle.
Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away
from the auxiliary battery because the battery may produce an explosion.
Use adequate ventilation when charging
or using the auxiliary battery in an enclosed space.
Remove all the caps before charging the
auxiliary battery.
Electrolyte is corrosive diluted sulphuric
acid.
If electrolyte (battery acid) comes into contact with your hands, eyes, clothes and
the painted surface of your vehicle, it
should be thoroughly flushed with water.
If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them
with water immediately and thoroughly,
and get prompt medical attention.
E00800901311
This kit enables emergency repair of a small puncture in the tread area of a tyre that has run over a
nail, screw, or similar object.
Storage
The tyre repair kit is stowed under the rear seat cushion. The storage location of the tyre repair kit
should be remembered in case of an emergency.
NOTE
l If
the electric motor unit is started without
fully charging the auxiliary battery, it might
cause the anti-lock brake warning lamp to illuminate. Refer to “Anti-lock brake system
(ABS)” on page 5-15.
OHAE12E5
12345-
Tyre compressor
Tyre repair set
Tyre sealant bottle
Filler hose
Extension hose
(This hose is used for removal of sealant. It
is not used in emergency puncture repair.)
6- Valve insert (spare)
7- Valve remover
8- Speed restriction sticker
For emergencies
To remove
How to use the tyre repair kit
1. Remove the rear seat cushion. Refer to “Rear
seat cushion” on page 3-06.
2. Remove the screws (A), and remove the cover (B).
E00802200379
CAUTION
l The tyre sealant can cause health damage
l
l
l
l
3. Take out the tyre repair kit.
l
if swallowed. If you accidentally swallow
it, drink as much water as possible and immediately consult a doctor.
If the tyre sealant gets in your eyes or on
your skin, rinse with lots of water. If you
still sense an abnormality, consult a doctor.
Consult a doctor immediately if any allergic reactions occur.
Do not allow children to touch the tyre
sealant.
Do not breathe in the vapours of tyre sealant.
Be sure to use a genuine MITSUBISHI
tyre sealant.
• More than one tyre is punctured.
• The puncture hole has a length or width
of 4 mm or more.
• The tyre is punctured in the side wall (A),
not in the tread (B).
NOTE
l The tyre sealant cannot be used in any of the
situations listed below. If any of these situations occurs, please contact a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point or another specialist.
• The tyre sealant’s expiry date has passed.
(The expiry date is shown on the bottle label.)
To install
Perform the removal steps in reverse.
OHAE12E5
7
• The vehicle has been driven with the tyre
almost completely flat.
• The tyre has completely slipped over the
wheel rim and has come off the wheel.
• The wheel is damaged.
7-05
For emergencies
l Use the tyre sealant only at ambient tempera-
tures of -30 °C to + 60 °C.
an emergency repair without pulling
out the object (nail, screw, etc.) that is stuck
in the tyre.
Do not use the tyre sealant if the tyre has
been damaged by being driven when insufficiently inflated (e.g. bumps, cuts, cracks etc.
on the tyre).
Wipe tyre sealant off the paintwork immediately with a damp cloth.
Immediately wash clothes contaminated with
tyre sealant.
CAUTION
l Effect
l
l
l
Before repairing a tyre, first stop your vehicle in a
safe, flat location.
1. Park the vehicle on level and stable ground.
2. Set the parking brake firmly.
3. Move the selector lever to the “P” (PARK)
position and turn the electric motor switch to
the “LOCK” position.
4. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and set
up a warning triangle, flashing signal lamp,
etc., at an adequate distance from the vehicle, and have all your passengers leave the vehicle.
5. Take out the tyre sealant bottle and the compressor.
6. Shake the tyre sealant bottle well.
l If you shake the bottle after screwing on
the hose, sealant may spray out of the hose.
8. Take the valve cap (G) off the tyre valve (H),
then press the valve remover (I) onto the
valve as illustrated. Allow all of the air in the
tyre to escape.
NOTE
l In cold conditions (when the ambient temperature is 0 °C or lower), thickening of the tyre
sealant can make the tyre sealant hard to
squeeze out of the bottle. Warm the bottle inside the vehicle.
7. Take the cap (C) off the tyre sealant bottle
(D). Do not remove the seal (E). Screw the
filler hose (F) onto the bottle (D). As you
screw the filler hose onto the bottle, the seal
will break, allowing the sealant to be used.
7
7-06
OHAE12E5
9. Remove the valve insert (J) by turning it anticlockwise using the valve remover (I). Put
the removed valve insert in a clean place so
it does not get dirty.
For emergencies
11. Holding the sealant bottle upside-down,
squeeze it again and again to inject all of the
sealant into the tyre.
Fit the valve insert (J) into the valve (H), and
screw the valve insert securely into place using the valve remover (I).
CAUTION
l If
there is any air left in the tyre when
you remove the valve insert, the valve insert may fly out and injure you. Make
sure the tyre contains no air before removing the valve insert.
10. Remove the plug (K) from the free end of the
hose (L). Press the hose onto the valve (H).
NOTE
l When
injecting the sealant, position the
valve away from the bottom, i.e., away from
the point where the tyre touches the ground.
If the valve is near the point where the tyre
touches the ground, the sealant may not go into the tyre easily.
12. After injecting the sealant, pull the hose off
the valve, remove any residual sealant from
the valve, rim and/or tyre.
NOTE
l When removing and screwing in the valve insert using the valve remover, turn the valve
remover by hand. Using a tool to turn the
valve remover could damage it.
13. Pull out the compressor hose (M) from the
side of the tyre compressor, and then securely attach the hose to the tyre valve (H).
7
OHAE12E5
7-07
For emergencies
14. Place the compressor (N) with its air pressure gauge (O) on top.
Pull out the compressor’s power cord (P), insert the plug on the cord into the accessory
socket (Q), and then turn the electric motor
switch to the “ACC” position.
Turn ON the compressor switch (R) and inflate the tyre to the specified pressure.
CAUTION
l Any sand or dust sucked into the compres-
l
sor could make the compressor break
down. Do not place the compressor directly on any sandy or dusty surface when using it.
Do not disassemble or modify the compressor. Also, do not subject the air pressure gauge to shock. It could malfunction.
15. Check and adjust the tyre pressure with reference to the air pressure gauge on the compressor. If you overinflate the tyre, release air by
loosening the hose’s end fitting. (Refer to
“Tyre inflation pressures” on page 8-15.)
If there is a gap between the tyre and wheel
because the tyre has moved inward from the
wheel rim, press the periphery of the tyre towards the wheel to close the gap before running the compressor. (With no gaps, the tyre
pressure will rise.)
CAUTION
CAUTION
7
l The supplied compressor is designed only
l
l
7-08
for inflation of your vehicle tyres.
The compressor is designed to run on a vehicle’s 12 V power supply. Do not connect
it to any other power source.
The compressor is not waterproof. If you
use it in rain, make sure water does not
get on it.
l
l
Be careful not to get your fingers trapped
between the tyre and wheel as the tyre inflates.
The surface of the compressor will get
hot while the compressor is running. Do
not keep the compressor running continuously for more than 10 minutes. After using the compressor, wait for the compressor to cool before using it again.
OHAE12E5
CAUTION
l If
the compressor becomes sluggish or
hot while operating, it is overheating. Immediately place the switch in the OFF position and let the compressor cool down
for at least 30 minutes.
NOTE
l If the tyre pressure does not rise to the speci-
fied level within 10 minutes, the tyre may be
so severely damaged that the tyre sealant cannot be used to effect an emergency repair.
Please contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point or another specialist
in this event.
16. Turn OFF the compressor switch, then pull
the power cord plug out of the socket.
NOTE
l Simply putting sealant and air into the tyre using the tyre repair kit does not seal the puncture hole. Air will leak through the puncture
hole until the emergency repair procedure is
completed (through step 19 of these instructions).
17. When you have inflated the tyre to the specified pressure, stow the compressor, bottle,
and other items in the vehicle and promptly
start driving the vehicle so that the tyre sealant can spread evenly in the tyre. Drive with
great care. Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h
(50 mph). Observe local speed limits.
For emergencies
If the tyre pressure has apparently not dropped, the emergency repair procedure is complete. You must still not exceed a speed of
80 km/h (50 mph). Observe local speed limits.
CAUTION
l If you sense any abnormality while driv-
ing, stop the vehicle and contact a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
Service Point or another specialist. Otherwise the tyre pressure may drop before
the emergency repair procedure is completed, rendering the vehicle unsafe.
Point or another specialist and have tyre repair/replacement performed.
CAUTION
l
Be sure to check the tyre pressure for confirmation that the emergency repair procedure is complete.
NOTE
l Driving
faster than 80 km/h (50 mph) can
make the vehicle vibrate.
18. After driving for 10 minutes or 5 km
(3 miles), check the tyre pressure using the
air pressure gauge on the compressor. (Refer
to “Tyre inflation pressures” on page 8-15.)
If the tyre pressure is not sufficient, inflate
the tyre to the specified pressure again and
drive the vehicle carefully without exceeding
a speed of 80 km/h (50 mph).
CAUTION
l If the tyre pressure is lower than the min-
imum permitted pressure (1.3 bar {130
kPa}), the tyre cannot successfully be repaired with the tyre sealant. Do not drive
the vehicle any further. Contact a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
Service Point or another specialist.
19. After driving for 10 minutes or 5 km
(3 miles), check the tyre pressure using the
air pressure gauge on the compressor. (Refer
to “Tyre inflation pressures” on page 8-15.)
NOTE
l If
l
the tyre pressure has dropped below the
specified level when you check it at the end
of the repair procedure, do not drive the vehicle any further. Contact a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point or another specialist.
In cold conditions (when the ambient temperature is 0 °C or lower), the time and driving
distance necessary until completion of the repair can be longer than in warmer conditions,
meaning that the tyre pressure can drop below the specified level even when you have
inflated the tyre a second time and subsequently driven the vehicle. If this happens, inflate
the tyre to the specified pressure once more,
drive for about 10 minutes or 5 km (3 miles),
then check the tyre pressure again. If the tyre
pressure has again dropped below the specified level, stop driving the vehicle and contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
Service Point or another specialist.
CAUTION
l
Do not affix the sticker anywhere except
the specified position on the pad of the
steering wheel. Affixing the sticker in an
incorrect position could prevent the SRS
airbag from working normally.
NOTE
l Please give the empty sealant bottle to your
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
Point when you purchase new sealant or dispose of the sealant bottle according to national regulations for the disposal of chemical
waste.
20. Affix the speed restriction sticker (R) to the
three-diamond mark on the steering wheel.
Then immediately drive with great care to a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
OHAE12E5
7-09
7
For emergencies
lA
l
l
l
tyre in which puncture sealant has been
used should ideally be replaced with a new
one. If you wish to have such a tyre properly
repaired for reuse, please contact a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
Point or another specialist. Note that a proper
repair is impossible following an emergency
repair if the puncture hole cannot be located.
Wipe away any sealant that gets on the
wheel. Provided the valve is replaced with a
new one, the wheel can be reused.
The manufacturer is unable to guarantee that
all tyre punctures can be repaired with the
tyre repair kit, in particular cuts or perforations with a diameter of more than 4 mm or
away from the tyre’s tread. The manufacturer
is not liable for damage sustained through improper use of the tyre repair kit.
The manufacturer is not liable for damage sustained through re-use of any tyre in which
tyre sealant has been used.
Towing
E00801503549
If your vehicle needs to be towed
If you need to tow your vehicle, we recommend
that you contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point or a commercial tow truck service.
In the following cases, transport the vehicle using a
tow truck.
l The ready indicator illuminates but the vehicle does not move, or an abnormal noise is
produced.
l Inspection of the vehicle’s underside reveals
that oil or some other fluid is leaking.
If a wheel gets stuck in a ditch, do not try to tow
the vehicle. Please contact your MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point or a commercial tow truck service for assistance.
Only when you cannot receive a towing service
from a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point or commercial tow truck service, tow
your vehicle carefully in accordance with the instructions given in “Emergency towing” in this part.
7
7-10
The regulations concerning towing may differ from
country to country. It is recommended that you
obey the regulations of the area where you are driving your vehicle.
OHAE12E5
Towing with rear wheels raised off the ground
Towing with front wheels raised off the ground
For emergencies
Towing the vehicle by a tow truck
CAUTION
l
l
l
l
This vehicle must not be towed by a tow
truck using sling lift type equipment
(Type A) as illustrated. Using a sling lift
will damage the bumper and front end.
If the transmission is malfunctioning or
damaged, transport the vehicle with the
driving wheels on a carriage (Type B, D
or E) as illustrated.
If you tow the vehicle with only the front
wheels or only the rear wheels raised off
the ground (Type B or C) after starting
the electric motor unit, the Active Stability Control (ASC) system may operate, resulting in an accident.
If you tow the vehicle with the driving
wheels on the ground (Type C) as illustrated, make sure that the towing speed and
distance given below are never exceeded,
causing damage to the transmission.
Towing with front wheels raised off the ground
(Type C)
Release the parking brake.
Place the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
Turn the electric motor switch to the “ACC” position.
Emergency towing
If towing service is not available in an emergency,
your vehicle may be temporarily towed by a rope
secured to the towing hook.
In case of your vehicle is to be towed by another
vehicle, pay careful attention to the following points.
If your vehicle is to be towed by another vehicle
1. The front towing hook (A) is located as
shown in the illustration. Secure the tow rope
to the front towing hook.
Towing speed: 30 km/h (19 mph)
Towing distance: 30 km (19 miles)
l
NOTE
l Using any part other than the designated tow-
ing hook (A) could result in damage to the vehicle body.
OHAE12E5
in damage to the vehicle body. It is best to
use a non-metallic rope. If you use a wire
rope or metal chain, wrap it with cloth at any
point where it touches the vehicle body.
Take care that the tow rope is kept as horizontal as possible. An angled tow rope can damage the vehicle body.
2. Start the electric motor unit.
If the electric motor unit does not start, turn
the electric motor switch to the “ACC” position.
CAUTION
l
l
For the towing speed and the towing distance, follow the local driving laws and
regulations.
Towing with rear wheels raised off the ground
(Type B)
Place the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
Turn the electric motor switch to the “ACC” position and secure the steering wheel in a straightahead position with a rope or tie-down strap.
l Using a wire rope or metal chain can result
If the vehicle is towed with the electric motor switch in the “ON” position without
starting the electric motor unit, the auxiliary battery may be flat during towing. In
this case, the brake performance may be
very poor. Steering is also very heavy.
Therefore, start the electric motor unit as
much as possible for towing.
Do not leave the electric motor switch in
the “LOCK” position. The steering wheel
will lock, causing loss of control.
3. Place the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
4. Turn on the hazard warning lamps if required
by law. (Follow the local driving laws and
regulations.)
5. During towing make sure that close contact
is maintained between the drivers of both vehicles, and that the vehicles travel at low
speed.
7-11
7
For emergencies
CAUTION
l The
l
l
l
person in the vehicle being towed
must pay attention to the brake lamps of
the towing vehicle and make sure the
rope never becomes slack.
Avoid sudden braking, sudden acceleration and sharp turning; such operation
could cause damage to the towing hooks
or the tow rope.
People in the vicinity could be injured as
a result.
When towing or being towed down a long
slope, the brakes may overheat reducing
the effectiveness. In this situation, have
your vehicle transported by a tow truck.
When the vehicle is to be towed by another vehicle with all wheels on the ground,
make sure that the towing speed and distance given below are never exceeded,
causing damage to the transmission.
Towing speed: 30 km/h (19 mph)
Towing distance: 30 km (19 miles)
For the towing speed and the towing distance, follow the local driving laws and
regulations.
7
Operation under adverse driving
conditions
E00801702717
On a flooded road
l Do not drive on a flooded road. If you drive
l
l
on a flooded road, not only the electric motor
unit stops but also a failure like electric leakage or short circuit may occur.
If you inevitably had to run on a flooded
road and the vehicle was exposed to water,
be sure to have your vehicle inspected by a
MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service
Point.
If there is water on the brakes after driving
through puddles or washing the vehicle, resulting in temporarily ineffective brakes. In
such cases, lightly depress the brake pedal to
see if the brakes operate properly. If they do
not, lightly depress the pedal several times
while driving in order to dry the brake pads.
When driving in rain or on a road with many
puddles a layer of water may form between
the tyres and the road surface.
This reduces a tyre’s frictional resistance on
the road, resulting in loss of steering stability
and braking capability.
To cope with this, observe the following items:
Towing another vehicle
Your vehicle cannot be used to tow another vehicle.
7-12
On a snow-covered or frozen road
l When driving on a snow-covered or frozen
(a)
Drive your vehicle at slow speed.
(b)
Do not drive on worn tyres.
(c)
Always maintain the specified
tyre inflation pressures.
OHAE12E5
l
l
l
l
road, it is recommended that you use snow
tyres or tyre chains.
Refer to the “Snow tyres” and “Tyre chains”
sections.
Avoid high-speed driving, sudden acceleration, sudden braking, and sharp turns.
Depressing the brake pedal during travel on
snowy or icy roads may cause tyre slippage
and skidding. Tyres may slip if the ability of
the tyres to grip the road surface lessens.
This may make it more difficult to stop the
vehicle with normal braking operations. For
vehicles with an anti-lock brake system
(ABS), firmly depress and hold down the
brake pedal.
Allow extra distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle in front of you, and avoid sudden braking.
Accumulation of ice on the braking system
can cause the wheels to lock. Pull away from
a standstill slowly after confirming safety
around the vehicle.
CAUTION
l Do not press the accelerator pedal rapidly. If the wheels break free of the ice, the
vehicle could suddenly start moving and
possibly cause an accident.
On a bumpy or rutted road
Drive as slow as possible when driving on bumpy
or rutted roads.
For emergencies
CAUTION
l The impact on tyres and/or wheels when
l
driving on a bumpy or rutted road can
damage the tyre and/or wheel.
The vehicle’s body, bumper, muffler and
other parts may be damaged if the vehicle is:
• driven over a step (for example, at the
entrance or exit of a parking lot);
• parked too closely against a kerb or
parking block, or by the side of a road
with kerbstones;
• driven on a steep slope;
7
OHAE12E5
7-13
OHAE12E5
Vehicle care and Maintenance
Vehicle care precautions...............................................................8-02
Cleaning the interior of your vehicle............................................8-02
Cleaning the exterior of your vehicle...........................................8-03
Service precautions.......................................................................8-06
Bonnet...........................................................................................8-07
Coolant/Hot water heater fluid.....................................................8-09
Washer fluid.................................................................................8-11
Brake fluid....................................................................................8-11
Auxiliary battery...........................................................................8-12
Tyres.............................................................................................8-14
Wiper blades.................................................................................8-17
General maintenance....................................................................8-19
For cold and snowy weather.........................................................8-20
Fusible links..................................................................................8-20
Fuses.............................................................................................8-20
Replacement of lamp bulbs..........................................................8-23
8
OHAE12E5
Vehicle care and Maintenance
Vehicle care precautions
E08400100015
In order to maintain the value of your vehicle, it is
necessary to perform regular maintenance using the
proper procedures.
Always maintain your vehicle in compliance with
environmental pollution control regulations.
Carefully select the materials used for washing,
etc., to be sure that they do not contain corrosives.
If in doubt, we recommend you to consult a specialist for selection of these materials.
CAUTION
l
l
Cleaning products can be dangerous. Always follow the instructions of the cleaning product supplier.
To avoid damage, never use the following
to clean your vehicle:
• Petrol
• Paint Thinner
• Benzine
• Kerosene
• Turpentine
• Naphtha
• Lacquer Thinner
• Carbon Tetrachloride
• Nail Polish Remover
• Acetone
Cleaning the interior of your
vehicle
E08400200016
After cleaning the interior of your vehicle with water, cleaner or similar, wipe and dry in a shady, wellventilated area.
CAUTION
l
Do not use organic substances (solvents,
benzine, kerosene, alcohol, petrol, etc.) or
alkaline or acidic solutions.
These chemicals can cause discolouring,
staining or cracking of the surface.
If you use cleaners or polishing agents,
make sure their ingredients do not include the substances mentioned above.
Plastic, vinyl leather, fabric and
flocked parts
E08400300017
1. Gently wipe off with a sponge, gauze or other soft cloth soaked with a 3% aqueous solution of neutral detergent.
2. Dip cloth in fresh water and wring it out
well. Using this cloth, wipe off the detergent
thoroughly.
l Do not use cleaners, conditioners, and protec-
tants containing silicons or wax.
Such products, when applied to the instrument panels or other parts, may cause reflections on the windscreen and obscure vision.
Also, if such products get on the switches of
the electrical accessories, it may lead to failure of these accessories.
Upholstery
E08400400018
1. To maintain the value of your new vehicle,
handle the upholstery carefully and keep the
interior clean.
Use a vacuum cleaner and brush to clean the
seats. If stained, vinyl and synthetic leather
should be cleaned with an appropriate cleaner. Cloth fabrics can be cleaned with either
upholstery cleaner or a 3% aqueous solution
of neutral detergent in lukewarm water.
2. Clean the carpeting with a vacuum cleaner
and remove any stains with carpet cleaner.
Oil and grease can be removed by lightly dabbing with a clean colourfast cloth and stain remover.
Genuine leather
E08400500019
1. Gently wipe off with gauze or other soft
cloth soaked with a 5 % aqueous solution of
neutral detergent.
2. Dip cloth in fresh water and wring it out
well. Using this cloth, wipe off the detergent
thoroughly.
3. Apply leather protecting agent to the genuine
leather surface.
8
8-02
NOTE
OHAE12E5
Vehicle care and Maintenance
NOTE
l If genuine leather is wet with water or is washl
l
l
l
ed in water, wipe off water as quickly as possible with a dry, soft cloth. If left damp, mildew may grow.
The genuine leather surface may be damaged
if a nylon brush or synthetic fibre is rubbed
hard against it.
Organic solvents such as benzine, kerosene,
alcohol and petrol, acid or alkaline solvents
may discolour the genuine leather surface.
Be sure to use neutral detergents.
Remove dirty patches or oil substances quickly as they can stain genuine leather.
The genuine leather surface may harden and
shrink if it is exposed to direct sun for long
hours. When your vehicle is parked, place it
in the shade as much as possible.
Cleaning the exterior of your
vehicle
E08400600010
If the following is left on your vehicle, it may
cause corrosion, discolouration and stains, wash
the vehicle as soon as possible.
l Seawater, road deicing products.
l Soot and dust, iron powder from factories,
chemical substance (acids, alkalis, coal-tar,
etc.).
l Droppings from birds, carcasses of insects,
tree sap, etc.
WARNING
l
l
l
Washing
E08400700011
Chemicals contained in the dirt and dust picked up
from the road surface can damage the paint coat
and body of your vehicle if left in prolonged contact.
Frequent washing and waxing is the best way to protect your vehicle from this damage. This will also
be effective in protecting it from environmental elements such as rain, snow, salt air, etc.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Park the
vehicle in the shade and spray it with water to remove dust. Next, using an ample amount of clean
water and a car washing brush or sponge, wash the
vehicle from top to bottom.
Use a mild car washing soap if necessary. Rinse
thoroughly and wipe dry with a soft cloth. After
washing the vehicle, carefully clean the joints and
flanges of the doors, bonnet and other sections
where dirt is likely to remain.
l
l
l
l
l
l
OHAE12E5
Do not wash the vehicle while charging
the traction battery.
Doing so could cause fire or an electric
shock.
Before washing the vehicle, make sure
that the charging lid and the inner lid are
completely closed.
If the lid is open, the charging unit is exposed to water, resulting in fire or an electric shock.
Do not pour water inside the electric motor unit room. Doing so could cause fire
or an electric shock.
When washing the vehicle, turn the electric motor switch to the “LOCK” position.
Do not use a high pressure washing machine to clean the underneath of the vehicle.
Doing so might cause the electric motor
unit problem or malfunction.
When washing the underside of your vehicle or wheel, be careful not to injure your
hands.
Refrain from excessively using a car wash
as its brushes may scratch the paint surface, causing it to lose its gloss. Scratches
will be especially visible on darker coloured vehicles.
Never spray or splash water on the electrical components in the bonnet room.
Exercise caution also when washing the
underbody; be careful not to spray water
into the bonnet room.
Some types of hot water washing equipment apply high pressure and heat to the
8-03
8
Vehicle care and Maintenance
WARNING
l
l
8
8-04
vehicle. They may cause heat distortion
and damage to the vehicle resin parts and
may result in flooding of the vehicle interior.
Therefore;
• Maintain a distance of approx. 70 cm
or more between the vehicle body and
the washing nozzle.
• When washing around the door glass,
hold the nozzle at a distance of more
than 70 cm and at right angles to the
glass surface.
After washing the vehicle, drive the vehicle slowly while lightly depressing the
brake pedal several times in order to dry
out the brakes.
Leaving the brakes wet could result in reduced braking performance. Also, there
is a possibility that they could freeze up
or become inoperative due to rust, rendering the vehicle unable to move.
When using an automatic car wash, pay
attention to the following items, referring
to the operation manual or consulting a
car wash operator. If the following procedure is not followed, it could result in damage to your vehicle.
• The outside mirrors are retracted.
• The antenna is removed.
• The wiper arms are secured in place
with tape.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a rear
spoiler, consult a car wash operator before using the car wash.
During cold weather
Salt and other chemicals spread on the roads in
some areas in winter can have a harmful effect on
the vehicle body. You should therefore wash the vehicle as often as possible in accordance with our
care-instructions. It is recommended to have a preservative applied and the underfloor protection
checked before and after the cold weather season.
After washing your vehicle, wipe off all waterdrops from the rubber parts around the doors to prevent the doors from freezing.
NOTE
l To
prevent freezing of the weatherstripping
on the doors, bonnet, etc., they should be treated with silicone spray.
Waxing
E08400800012
Waxing the vehicle will help prevent the adherence
of dust and road chemicals to the paintwork. Apply
a wax solution after washing the vehicle, or at least
once every three months to assist displacing of water.
Do not wax your vehicle in direct sunlight. You
should wax after the surfaces have cooled.
CAUTION
l
Waxes containing high abrasive compounds should not be used. Such waxes remove rust and stains effectively from the
paintwork but they are harmful to the lustre on the painted surface and the plated
surface.
Further, they are harmful to glossy surfaces such as grille, garnish, mouldings, etc.
OHAE12E5
CAUTION
l Do not use petrol or paint thinners to rel
move road tar or other contamination to
the painted surface.
Do not apply wax to sections that have a
black mat paint coating, as doing so
could cause uneven discolouration, spots
or stains. If wax gets on such areas, wipe
it off using lukewarm water and a soft
cloth.
Polishing
E08400900013
The vehicle should only be polished if the paintwork has become stained or lost its lustre. Do not
polish parts with a mat coating and the plastic bumpers. Doing so could cause stains or damage the finish.
Damaged paint
E08401000011
Small cracks and scratches in the paint coat should
be touched up as soon as possible with
MITSUBISHI touch-up paint to prevent corrosion.
Check body areas facing the road or the tyres carefully for damage to the paint caused by gravels,
etc. The paint code number for your vehicle can be
found on the vehicle information code plate. (Refer
to “Vehicle information code plate” on page 9-02.)
Cleaning plastic parts
E08401100012
Use a sponge or chamois leather.
If a car wax adheres on a grey or black rough surface of the bumper, moulding or lamps, the surface
becomes white. In such a case, wipe it off using
lukewarm water and soft cloth or chamois leather.
Vehicle care and Maintenance
CAUTION
Wiper blades
CAUTION
E08401500016
l Do
l Do not use a brush or other hard imple-
l
l
l
not use a scrubbing brush or other
hard tools as they may damage the plastic
part surface.
Do not use wax containing compound (polishing powder) which may damage the
plastic part surface.
Do not bring the plastic parts into contact
with petrol, light oil, brake fluids,
greases, paint thinners, and sulphuric
acid (battery electrolyte) which may
crack, stain or discolour the plastic parts.
If they touch the plastic parts, wipe them
off with soft cloth, chamois or the like
and an aqueous solution of neutral detergent then immediately rinse the affected
parts with water.
Chrome parts
E08401200013
In order to prevent spots and corrosion of chrome
parts, wash with water, dry thoroughly, and apply a
special protective coating. This should be done
more frequently in winter.
Aluminium wheels
E08401300014
1. Remove dirt using a sponge while sprinkling
water on the vehicle.
2. Use neutral detergent on any dirt that cannot
be removed easily with water.
Rinse off the neutral detergent after washing
the vehicle.
3. Dry the vehicle thoroughly using a chamois
leather or a soft cloth.
l
l
ment on the wheels.
Doing so could scratch the wheels.
Do not use any cleaner that contains an
abrasive substance or is acidic or alkaline. Doing so could cause the coating on
the wheels to peel or become discoloured
or stained.
Do not directly apply hot water using a
steam cleaner or by any other means.
Contact with seawater and road deicer
can cause corrosion. Rinse off such substances as soon as possible.
Window glass
E08401400015
The window glass can normally be cleaned using
only a sponge and water.
Glass cleaner can be used to remove oil, grease, insect carcasses, etc. After washing the glass, wipe it
dry with a clean, dry, soft cloth. Never use a cloth
that is used for cleaning a painted surface to clean a
window. Wax from the painted surface could get
on the glass and lower glass transparency and visibility.
Use a soft cloth and glass cleaner to remove grease,
dead insects, etc., from the wiper blades. Replace
the wiper blades when they no longer wipe properly. (Refer to page 8-17.)
Bonnet room
E08401600017
Clean the bonnet room at the beginning and end of
winter. Pay particular attention to flanges, crevices
and peripheral parts where dust containing road
chemicals and other corrosive materials might collect.
If salt and other chemicals are used on the roads in
your area, clean the engine compartment at least every three months.
Never spray or splash water on the electrical components in the bonnet room, as this may cause damage.
Do not bring the nearby parts, the plastic parts and
so on into contact with sulphuric acid (battery electrolyte) which may crack, stain or discolour them.
If they are in contact, wipe off with soft cloth, chamois or the like and an aqueous solution of neutral
detergent then immediately rinse the affected parts
with plenty of water.
NOTE
l To
clean the inside of the rear window, always use a soft cloth and wipe the window
glass along the demister heater element so as
not to cause damage.
OHAE12E5
8
8-05
Vehicle care and Maintenance
Service precautions
E08401700034
Adequate care of your vehicle at regular intervals
serves to preserve the value and appearance as long
as possible.
Maintenance items as described in this owner’s manual can be performed by the owner.
We recommend you to have the periodic inspection
and maintenance performed by a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point or another specialist.
In the event a malfunction or a problem is discovered, we recommend you to have it checked and repaired. Follow the instructions and cautions for
each of the various procedures.
: Components which generates high voltage.
WARNING
l Do not touch any components in the elec-
tric motor unit room other than the reserve tank. There are no components requiring inspection other than the reserve
tank. Never remove or disassemble the
component which generates high voltage,
high voltage wire (orange), its connector,
EV charging cable, charge connector,
plug and an outlet. Doing so could result
in a serious injury that may risk your life.
These components are affixed with the label indicating precautions for handling.
Follow the instructions on the label. Take
your vehicle to a MITSUBISHI
MOTORS Authorized Service Point for
any necessary maintenance.
8
8-06
1234567-
Service plug
Air conditioner compressor
Inverter
On board charger/DC-DC converter
Electric motor (Electric motor unit)
Traction battery
Heater
WARNING
WARNING
l
l
l Never
touch the service plug (A) under
the front seat. Doing so could result in serious injury that may risk your life, including an electric shock. The service
plug (A) is used to shut off high voltage
from the traction battery for repair of the
vehicle at a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point or another specialist.
OHAE12E5
l
l
When checking or servicing the inside of
the bonnet room and coolant reserve
tank, make sure the electric motor unit is
switched off and has had a chance to cool
down.
If it is necessary to do work in the bonnet
room with the electric motor running, be
especially careful that your clothing, hair,
etc., does not become caught by the fan,
or other moving parts.
The fan can turn on automatically even if
the electric motor is not running. Turn
the electric motor switch to the “LOCK”
position to be safe while you work in the
bonnet room.
Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open
flames around the auxiliary battery.
Vehicle care and Maintenance
Bonnet
WARNING
l Be
l
extremely cautious when working
around the auxiliary battery. It contains
poisonous and corrosive sulphuric acid.
Improper handling of components and
materials used in the vehicle can endanger your personal safety. We recommend
you to consult a specialist for necessary information.
E08402000018
To open
1. Pull the release lever towards you to unlock
the bonnet.
LHD (Passenger’s side)
CAUTION
l
l
The components inside the electric motor
unit room might be very hot to touch.
To avoid being burnt, make sure all components have sufficiently cooled before beginning an inspection.
These components are affixed with the label indicating precautions for handling.
Follow the instructions on the label.
When replacing the auxiliary battery, remove the connected positive (+) and negative (-) terminals after turning the electric
motor switch to the “LOCK” position
and waiting at least 1 minute. If the auxiliary battery terminal is removed just after the electric motor switch is turned to
the “LOCK” position, this may cause damage to components of the electric motor
unit.
NOTE
l Only open the bonnet when the wipers are in
the parked position. In any other position,
the wipers could damage the paint or bonnet.
3. Support the bonnet by inserting the support
bar (B) into its slot on the underside of the
bonnet arm (C).
RHD (Driver’s side)
2. Raise the bonnet while pressing the safety
lock (A).
OHAE12E5
8
8-07
Vehicle care and Maintenance
3. Make sure the bonnet is securely locked by
softly lifting the centre of the bonnet.
CAUTION
l Be
l
CAUTION
l
l
Note that the support bar may disengage
the bonnet if the open bonnet is lifted by
a strong wind.
After inserting the support bar into the
slot, make sure the bar supports the bonnet securely from falling down on to your
head or body.
To close
1. While supporting the bonnet, remove the support bar from the bonnet arm hole and secure
it to the clip.
2. Slowly lower the bonnet to a position about
30 cm above the closed position, then let it
drop.
NOTE
l If
l
8
8-08
this does not close the bonnet, release it
from a slightly higher position.
Do not press down the bonnet hard with a
hand as it may damage the bonnet.
OHAE12E5
careful that hands or fingers are not
trapped when closing the bonnet.
Before driving, make sure that the bonnet is securely locked. An incompletely
locked bonnet can suddenly open while
driving. This can be extremely dangerous.
Vehicle care and Maintenance
Coolant/Hot water heater fluid
E08402100019
To check the coolant level
Coolant
1. Open the tailgate.
NOTE
l A heat insulating material is attached to the
luggage floor carpet. To remove the luggage
floor carpet, grab and lift up both the carpet
fabric and the heat insulating material.
While the motor is cold, the coolant level
must always be between the “FULL” and
“LOW” marks.
FULL
3. Turn the 4 screws on the front and rear of the
electric motor unit room lid (C) anticlockwise to loosen and remove them, and then remove the electric motor unit room lid (C).
LOW
5. Refit the electric motor unit room lid and the
luggage floor carpet by following the removal procedures in reverse.
2. Peel off the Velcro fastener (A) to remove
the luggage floor carpet (B).
NOTE
l When laying the electric motor unit room lid
on the ground, leave the underside of the lid
with the rubber surface facing up. If the underside is facing downward rubbish and other foreign material could get on the rubber
surface and prevent proper reinstallation of
the electric motor unit room lid.
4. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank
(D).
OHAE12E5
Hot water heater fluid
A transparent reserve tank (A) is located in the bonnet room.
The coolant level in this tank should be kept between the “FULL” and “LOW” marks when measured while the electric motor is cold.
FULL
8
LOW
8-09
Vehicle care and Maintenance
To add coolant
The cooling system is a closed system and normally the loss of coolant should be very slight. A noticeable drop in the coolant level could indicate leakage. If this occurs, we recommend you to have the
system checked as soon as possible.
If the level should drop below the “LOW” level on
the reserve tank, open the reserve tank cap (E) and
add coolant.
WARNING
l Do
not open the reserve tank cap (E)
while it is hot. The coolant system is under pressure and any hot coolant escaping could cause severe burns.
Anti-freeze
The coolant contains an ethylene glycol anti-corrosion agent. Some parts of the electric motor are
cast aluminium alloy, and periodic changing of the
electric motor coolant is necessary to prevent corrosion of these parts.
Use “DIA QUEEN SUPER LONG LIFE COOLANT PREMIUM” or equivalent*.
*: similar high quality ethylene glycol based nonsilicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and non-borate coolant with long life hybrid organic acid technology
8
MITSUBISHI Genuine Coolant has excellent protection against corrosion and rust formation of all
metals including aluminium and can avoid blockages in the radiator, heater, etc.
8-10
Because of the necessity of this anti-corrosion
agent, the coolant must not be replaced with plain
water even in summer. The required concentration
of anti-freeze differs depending on the expected ambient temperature.
Above -35 °C: 50 % concentration of anti-freeze
Below -35 °C: 60 % concentration of anti-freeze
CAUTION
l
l
l
l
Do not use alcohol or methanol antifreeze or any engine coolants mixed with
alcohol or methanol anti-freeze. The use
of an improper anti-freeze can cause corrosion of the aluminium components.
Do not use water to adjust the concentration of coolant.
Concentrations exceeding 60 % will result in a reduction of both the anti-freeze
and cooling performance.
Do not top up with water only.
Water by itself reduces the rust-protective and anti-freeze qualities of the coolant and has a lower boiling point. It can
also cause damage to the cooling system if
it should freeze. Do not use tapwater, as it
can cause corrosion and rust formation.
During cold weather
If the temperatures in your area drop below freezing, there is the danger that the coolant in the electric motor, on board charger/DC-DC converter or
radiator could freeze and cause severe damage to
the electric motor, on board charger/DC-DC converter and/or radiator. Add a sufficient amount of
anti-freeze to the coolant to prevent it from freezing.
OHAE12E5
The concentration should be checked before the
start of cold weather and anti-freeze added to the
system if necessary.
Vehicle care and Maintenance
Washer fluid
Brake fluid
E08402200010
Check if the fluid level is between the “FULL” and
“1/2” on the washer fluid reservoir.
If the level is low, replenish the container with washer fluid.
E08406100017
To check the fluid level
The brake fluid level must be between the “MAX”
and “MIN” marks on the reservoir.
FULL
The brake fluid in the master cylinder should be
checked when doing other work under the bonnet.
The brake system should also be checked for leakage at the same time.
If the brake fluid level falls markedly in a short
length of time, it indicates leaks from the brake system.
If this occurs, we recommend you to have the vehicle checked.
Fluid type
Use brake fluid conforming to DOT3 or DOT4
from a sealed container. The brake fluid is hygroscopic. Too much moisture in the brake fluid will
adversely affect the brake system, reducing the performance.
CAUTION
l Take care in handling brake fluid as it is
NOTE
l
The washer fluid container serves the windscreen, rear window.
l
During cold weather
To ensure proper operation of the washers at low
temperatures, use a fluid containing an anti-freezing agent.
l
The brake fluid level is monitored by a float. When
the brake fluid level falls below the “MIN” mark,
the brake fluid warning lamp lights up.
The fluid level falls slightly with wear of the brake
pads, but this does not indicate any abnormality.
OHAE12E5
l
harmful to the eyes, may irritate your
skin and also damage painted surfaces.
Use only the specified brake fluid.
Do not mix or add different brands of
brake fluid to prevent chemical reactions.
Do not let any petroleum-based fluid
touch, mix with, or get into the brake fluid.
This will damage the seals.
Keep the reservoir tank cap closed to prevent the brake fluid from deteriorating except maintenance.
Clean the filler cap before removing and
close the cap securely after maintenance.
8-11
8
Vehicle care and Maintenance
Auxiliary battery
E08402300011
The condition of the auxiliary battery is very important to keep the vehicle’s electrical system working
properly. Regular inspection and care are especially important in cold weather.
To install
1. Install the auxiliary battery upper cover (B)
onto the auxiliary battery, and then push the
plastic nut (A) in the direction shown by the
arrows to secure the cover.
Checking auxiliary battery electrolyte
level
E08402500013
Removing and installing the auxiliary
battery upper cover
E08402400012
To remove
1. Turn the plastic nut (A) anticlockwise, and
then remove the auxiliary battery upper cover (B).
CAUTION
l Be sure to install the auxiliary battery upl
NOTE
l Be careful not to lose the removed plastic nut.
8
per cover. Otherwise, the battery electrolyte may spill and cause a malfunction.
When installing the auxiliary battery upper cover and plastic nut do not touch the
cooling fan or other moving parts in the
bonnet room.
Be especially careful that the cables, your
clothing or hair, etc., do not get caught in
the cooling fan or other moving parts.
NOTE
l Be sure to install the plastic nut in the correct
direction.
8-12
OHAE12E5
Before checking the auxiliary battery electrolyte level, remove the auxiliary battery’s upper cover.
The electrolyte level must be between the specified
limit on the outside of the auxiliary battery. Replenish with distilled water as necessary.
The inside of the auxiliary battery is divided into
several compartments; remove the cap from each
compartment and fill to the upper mark. Do not top
up beyond the upper mark because spillage during
driving could cause damage.
Check the electrolyte level at least once every 4
weeks, depending on the operating conditions.
If the auxiliary battery is not used, it will discharge
by itself with time.
Check it once every four weeks and charge with
low current if necessary.
Vehicle care and Maintenance
During cold weather
CAUTION
E08402600014
The capacity of the auxiliary battery is reduced at
low temperatures. This is an inevitable result of its
chemical and physical properties. This is why a
very cold auxiliary battery, particularly one that is
not fully charged will only deliver a fraction of the
starting current which is normally available.
We recommend you to have the auxiliary battery
checked before the start of cold weather and, if necessary, have it charged or replaced.
This does not only ensure reliable starting, but an
auxiliary battery which is kept fully charged also
has a longer life.
Disconnection and connection
E08402700015
To disconnect the auxiliary battery cable, stop the
electric motor unit, first disconnect the negative (-)
terminal and then the positive (+) terminal. When
connecting the auxiliary battery, first connect the
positive (+) terminal and then the negative (-) terminal.
l Keep it out of reach of children.
l When replacing the auxiliary battery, re-
WARNING
l
l
NOTE
l Open
l
the terminal cover (A) before disconnecting or connecting the positive (+) terminal of the auxiliary battery.
Loosen the nut (B), and then disconnect the
auxiliary battery cable from the positive (+)
terminal.
l
l
Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away
from the auxiliary battery because the
auxiliary battery could explode.
When installing the auxiliary battery,
start connection with the positive (+) terminal. If connection is started from the
negative (-) terminal, sparks will occur if
the positive (+) terminal touches any other parts, and this may cause the auxiliary
battery to explode.
The auxiliary battery electrolyte is extremely caustic. Do not allow it to come
in contact with your eyes, skin, clothing,
or the painted surfaces of the vehicle.
Spilt electrolyte should be flushed immediately with ample amounts of water.
Irritation to eyes or skin from contact
with electrolyte requires immediate medical attention.
Ventilate when charging or using the auxiliary battery in an enclosed space.
OHAE12E5
l
l
l
l
l
move the connected positive (+) and negative (-) terminals after turning the electric
motor switch to the “LOCK” position
and waiting at least 1 minute. If the auxiliary battery terminal is removed just after the electric motor switch is turned to
the “LOCK” position, this may cause damage to components of the electric motor
unit.
Never short-circuit the auxiliary battery.
This could cause it to overheat and be damaged.
If the auxiliary battery is to be quickcharged, first disconnect the battery cables.
In order to prevent a short circuit, be
sure to disconnect the negative (-) terminal first.
Always wear protective eye goggles when
working near the auxiliary battery.
Do not bring the nearby parts, the plastic
parts and so on into contact with sulphuric acid (battery electrolyte) which may
crack, stain or discolour them.
If they are in contact, wipe off with soft
cloth, chamois or the like and an aqueous
solution of neutral detergent then immediately rinse the affected parts with plenty of water.
8-13
8
Vehicle care and Maintenance
Tyres
NOTE
l Keep the terminals clean. After the auxiliary
l
l
l
battery is connected, apply terminal protection grease. To clean the terminals, use lukewarm water.
Check to see if the auxiliary battery is securely installed and cannot be moved during travel. Also check each terminal for tightness.
When the vehicle is to be left unused for a
long period of time, remove the auxiliary battery and store it in a place where the battery
fluid will not freeze. The auxiliary battery
should be stored only in a fully charged condition.
It is necessary to adjust the electronic controlled unit when the auxiliary battery is removed for a long period of time.
Consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
E08402800016
WARNING
l Driving
with tyres that are worn, damaged or improperly inflated can lead to
loss of control or blowout of the tyres
which can result in a collision with serious or fatal injury.
8
8-14
OHAE12E5
Vehicle care and Maintenance
Tyre inflation pressures
E08402900033
Tyre size
Front
Rear
145/65R15
2.5 bar (36 psi) [250 kPa]
—
175/55R15
—
2.5 bar (36 psi) [250 kPa]
Check the tyre inflation pressure of all the tyres while they are cold; if insufficient or excessive, adjust to the specified value.
After the tyre inflation pressure has been adjusted, check the tyres for damage and air leaks. Be sure to put caps on the valves.
8
OHAE12E5
8-15
Vehicle care and Maintenance
Wheel condition
Tyre rotation
CAUTION
E08403000015
E08403200017
l Always
use tyres of the same size, same
type, and same brand, and which have no
wear differences. Using tyres of different
size, type, brands or degree of wear, will
increase the differential oil temperature,
resulting in possible damage to the driving system. Further, the drive train will
be subjected to excessive loading, possibly
leading to oil leakage, component seizure,
or other serious faults.
1- Location of the tread wear indicator
2- Tread wear indicator
Check the tyres for cuts, cracks and other damage.
Replace the tyres if there are deep cuts or cracks.
Also check each tyre for pieces of metal or pebbles.
The use of worn tyres can be very dangerous because of the greater chance of skidding or hydroplaning. The tread depth of the tyres must exceed
1.6 mm in order for the tyres to meet the minimum
requirement for use.
Tread wear indicators will appear on the surface of
the tyre as the tyre wears, thereby indicating that
the tyre no longer meets the minimum requirement
for use. When these wear indicators appear, the
tyres must be replaced with new ones.
Replacing tyres and wheels
E08403100016
CAUTION
*: Front
l Avoid using different size tyres from the
l
one listed and the combined use of different types of tyres, as this can affect driving safety. Refer to “Tyres and wheels”
on page 9-05.
Even if a wheel has the same rim size and
offset as the specified type of wheel, its
shape may prevent it from being fitted correctly. We recommend you to consult a
specialist before using wheels that you
have.
8
8-16
Because the front and rear tyres and wheels are not
the same size, front and rear tyre rotation is not possible.
OHAE12E5
WARNING
l
Rotating tyres would compromise the stability and drivability of the vehicle and
could lead to a serious accident.
Snow tyres
E08403300018
The use of snow tyres is recommended for driving
on snow and ice. To preserve driving stability,
mount snow tyres of the same size and tread pattern on wheels.
A snow tyre that is worn down more than 50% is
no longer appropriate to use.
Snow tyres which do not meet specifications must
not be used.
Vehicle care and Maintenance
CAUTION
l Observe permissible maximum speed for
your snow tyres and the legal speed limit.
l
l Practice
l
NOTE
l
Wiper blades
CAUTION
The laws and regulations concerning snow
tyres (driving speed, required use, type, etc.)
vary. Find out and follow the laws and regulations in the area you intend to drive.
If flange nuts are used on your vehicle,
change to tapered nuts when steel wheels are
used.
l
l
l
Tyre chains
E08403400035
If tyre chains have to be used, ensure that they are
fitted only on the drive wheels (rear) in accordance
with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Use only tyre chains which are designed for use
with the tyres mounted on the vehicle: use of the incorrect size or type of chain could result in damage
to the vehicle body.
Contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized
Service Point before putting on tyre chains. The
max. chain height is as follows.
Tyre size
Wheel size
Max chain
height
[mm]
175/55R15
15 x 5 J
14 mm
When driving with tyre chains on the tyres, do not
drive faster than 50 km/h (30 mph). When you
reach roads that are not covered in snow, immediately remove the tyre chains.
l
l
fitting the chains before you
need them. Don’t expect help from other
people in the cold.
Choose a clear straight stretch of road
where you can pull over and still be seen
while you are fitting the chains.
Do not fit chains before you need them.
This will wear out your tyres and the
road surface.
After driving around 100-300 metres,
stop and retighten the chains.
Drive carefully and do not exceed
50 km/h (30 mph). Remember that preventing accidents is not the purpose of
tyre chains.
An aluminium wheel can be damaged by
a tyre chain while driving. When fitting a
tyre chain on an aluminium wheel, take
care that no part of the chain and fitting
can be brought into contact with the wheel.
When installing or removing the tyre
chains, take care that hands and other
parts of your body are not injured by the
sharp edges of the vehicle body.
E08403500010
If the blades are frozen to the windscreen or rear
window, do not operate the wipers until the ice has
melted and the blades are freed, otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.
NOTE
l When replacing the front wiper with a wiper
l
for use in cold regions, it is necessary to adjust the washer nozzle spray positions. Always contact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS
Authorized Service Point when replacing the
front wiper with a wiper for use in cold regions.
When removing snow and frost, be careful
not to damage the washer nozzles (A) attached to the wiper arm.
NOTE
l The laws and regulations concerning the use
of tyre chains vary. Always follow local laws
and regulations.
In most countries, it is prohibited by law to
use tyre chains on roads without snow.
Wiper blade rubber replacement
Windscreen wiper blades
1. Lift the wiper arm off the windscreen.
2. Pull the wiper blade until its stopper (A) disengages from the hook (B) as indicated direc-
OHAE12E5
8-17
8
Vehicle care and Maintenance
tion by the arrow (C) on the hook. Pull the
wiper blade to remove it.
3. Attach the retainers (D) to a new wiper
blade. Refer to the illustration to ensure that
the retainers are correctly aligned as you attach them.
NOTE
l Do not let the wiper arm drop onto the windscreen. This could damage the glass.
4. Insert the wiper blade into the arm, starting
with the opposite end of the blade from the
stopper. Make sure the hook (B) is fitted correctly in the grooves in the blade.
NOTE
l If a retainer is not supplied with the new wiper blade, use the retainer from the old blade.
8
8-18
OHAE12E5
5. Push the wiper blade until the hook (B) engages securely with the stopper (A).
Rear window wiper blades
1. Lift the wiper arm off the window glass.
2. Pull the wiper blade downward to disengage
it from the stopper (A) at the end of the wiper arm. Pull the wiper blade further to remove it.
3. Slide a new wiper blade through the hook
(B) on the wiper arm.
Vehicle care and Maintenance
4. Firmly insert the retainer (C) into the groove
(D) in the wiper blade.
Refer to the illustration to ensure that the retainers are correctly aligned as you insert
them into the groove.
General maintenance
E08403600011
Coolant and oil leakage
Look under the body of your vehicle to check for
coolant and oil leakage.
Exterior and interior lamp operation
Operate the combination lamp switch to check that
all lamps are functioning properly.
If the lamps do not illuminate, the probable cause
is a blown fuse or defective lamp bulb. Check the
fuses first. If there is no blown fuse, check the
lamp bulbs.
For information regarding the inspection and replacement of the fuses and the bulbs, refer to
“Fuses” on page 8-20 and “Replacement of lamp
bulbs” on page 8-23.
If the fuses and bulbs are all OK, we recommend
you to have your vehicle checked and repaired.
NOTE
l Do not allow the wiper arm to fall onto the
window glass; it could damage the glass.
Meter, gauge and indicator/warning
lamps operation
NOTE
l If a retainer is not supplied with the new wiper blade, use the retainer from the old blade.
Start the electric motor unit and check the operation of all instruments, gauges and indication and
warning lamps.
If there is anything wrong, we recommend you to
have your vehicle inspected.
Hinges and latches lubrication
Check all latches and hinges, and, if necessary,
have them lubricated.
OHAE12E5
8-19
8
Vehicle care and Maintenance
For cold and snowy weather
Fusible links
Fuses
E08403700012
E08403800013
The ventilation slots in front of the windscreen
should be kept clear of leaves or brushed clear after
heavy snowfall, so that the operation of the heating
and ventilation systems will not be impaired.
The fusible links will melt to prevent a fire if a
large current attempts to flow through certain electrical systems.
In case of a melted fusible link, we recommend
you to have your vehicle inspected.
For the fusible links, please refer to “Passenger compartment fuse location table” on page 8-21 and
“Bonnet room fuse location table” on page 8-22.
Ventilation slots
Weatherstripping
To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping on the
doors, bonnet, etc., they should be treated with silicone grease.
Additional equipment
It is a good idea to carry a shovel or a short-handled spade in the vehicle during the winter so that
you can clear away snow if you get stranded. A
small hand-brush for sweeping snow off the vehicle and a plastic scraper for the windscreen and
rear window are also useful.
E08404000012
To prevent damage to the electrical system due to
shortcircuiting or overloading, each individual circuit is provided with a fuse.
There are fuse blocks in the passenger compartment and in the bonnet room.
NOTE
WARNING
l Fusible links must not be replaced by any
other device. Failing to fit the correct fusible link may result in fire in the vehicle,
property destruction and serious or fatal
injuries at any time.
8
8-20
E08403900014
Fuse block location
OHAE12E5
l Spare
fuses are not provided. Please purchase it from a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point or other locations.
Passenger compartment
The fuse block in the passenger compartment is located in front of the driver’s seat at the position
shown in the illustration.
Press the tab (A) and remove the fuse cover (B).
Vehicle care and Maintenance
Bonnet room
In the bonnet room, the fuse block is located as
shown in the illustration. Press the tab (A) and remove the cover.
Passenger compartment fuse location table
E08404200014
No.
E08404100013
The fuse capacity and the names of electrical systems protected by the fuses are indicated on the
fuse block cover.
Capacities
Tail lamp (left)
7.5 A
2
Cigarette lighter/Accessory socket
15 A
—
Electrical system
Capacities
10
Control unit
7.5 A
11
Rear fog lamp
10 A
12
Central door lock
15 A
13
Room lamp
10 A
14
Rear window wiper
15 A
15
Gauge
7.5 A
16
Relay
7.5 A
17
Heated seat
20 A
18
Option
10 A
19
Heated door mirror
7.5 A
20
Windscreen wiper
20 A
—
21
Reversing lamps
7.5 A
Starter
7.5 A
22
Demister
30 A
5
Audio system amp
20 A
23
Heater
30 A
24
Auxiliary battery
30 A*
25
Radio
10 A
26
Electronic controlled
unit
15 A
—
—
Symbol
4
6
*:
Electrical system
1
3
Fuse load capacity
Symbol
No.
—
—
7
Tail lamp (right)
7.5 A
8
Outside rear-view mirrors
7.5 A
9
Control unit (Electric
motor unit)
7.5 A
*:
Fusible link
l Some fuses may not be installed on your ve-
Fusible link
hicle, depending on the vehicle model or specifications.
OHAE12E5
8-21
8
Vehicle care and Maintenance
l The
table above shows the main equipment
corresponding to each fuse.
No.
Symbol
9
Bonnet room fuse location table
E08404300015
Symbol
1
—
8
*:
Electrical system
Capacity
Capacity
Front fog lamps
15 A
10
Water pump (Electric
motor unit)
15 A
11
Charge
10 A
12
Hazard warning flasher
10 A
13
Horn
10 A
14
Daytime running lamps
10 A
15
No.
Electrical system
Traction battery cooling fan motor
15 A
16
Water pump (Air conditioning)
10 A
17
Headlamp low beam
(right)
20 A
18
Headlamp low beam
(left)
20 A
—
—
2
Auxiliary battery
30 A*
3
Electric motor switch
40 A*
19
Headlamp high-beam
(right)
10 A
4
Radiator fan motor
40 A*
20
Electric window control
40 A*
Headlamp high-beam
(left)
10 A
5
6
Brake electric vacuum
pump
30
A*
7
Electric motor unit control
15 A
8
Stop lamps
15 A
*:
E08404400016
Capacity
Colour
7.5 A
Brown
10 A
Red
15 A
Blue
20 A
Yellow
30 A
Green (fuse type) / Pink (fusible
link type)
40 A
Green (fusible link type)
Fuse replacement
E08404500017
1. Before replacing a fuse, always turn off the
electrical circuit concerned and turn the electric motor switch to the “LOCK” position.
2. Remove the fuse puller (A) from the inside
of the fuse cover in the passenger compartment.
Fusible link
l Some fuses may not be installed on your vel
hicle, depending on the vehicle model or specifications.
The table above shows the main equipment
corresponding to each fuse.
Fusible link
8-22
Identification of fuse
OHAE12E5
3. Referring to the fuse load capacity table,
check the fuse pertaining to the problem.
Vehicle care and Maintenance
CAUTION
l If the newly inserted fuse blows again afl
ter a short time, we recommend you to
have the electrical system checked to find
the cause and rectify it.
Never use a fuse with a capacity larger
than that specified or any substitute, such
as wire, foil, etc.; doing so will cause the
circuit wiring to heat up and this could
cause fire.
Replacement of lamp bulbs
E08404600018
Before replacing a bulb, ensure the lamp is off. Do
not touch the glass part of the new bulb with your
bare fingers; the skin oil left on the glass will evaporate when the bulb gets hot and the vapour will
condense on the reflector and dim the surface.
CAUTION
l
B- Fuse is OK
C- Blown fuse
Bulbs are extremely hot immediately after being turned off.
When replacing a bulb, wait for it to cool
sufficiently before touching it. You could
otherwise be burnt.
NOTE
l If any system does not function but the fuse
NOTE
corresponding to that system is normal, there
may be a fault in the system elsewhere. We
recommend you to have your vehicle checked.
l If
l
4. Insert a new fuse of the same capacity by using the fuse puller into the same place at the
fuse block.
l
you are unsure of how to carry out the
work as required, we recommend you to consult a specialist.
Be careful not to scratch the vehicle body
when removing a lamp or lens.
When it rains or when the vehicle has been
washed, the inside of the lens sometimes becomes foggy. This is the same phenomenon
as when window glass mists up on a humid
day, and does not indicate a functional problem.
When the lamp is switched on, the heat will
remove the fog. However, if water gathers inside the lamp, we recommend you to have
the lamp checked.
Bulb capacity
E08404700019
When replacing a bulb, use a new bulb with the
same wattage and colour.
OHAE12E5
8-23
8
Vehicle care and Maintenance
Outside
E08404800010
Front
789101112-
High-mounted stop lamp: 5 W (W5W)
Stop and tail lamps
Rear turn-signal lamps: 21 W (WY21W)
Licence plate lamps: 5 W (W5W)
Rear fog lamp: 21 W (W21W)
Reversing lamps: 21 W (W21W)
Codes in parentheses indicate bulb types.
Removing and installing the headlamp
unit
E08405000022
Bulbs for headlamps, position lamps or front turnsignal lamps are replaced by removing the entire
headlamp unit from the vehicle.
Back side of the headlamp
NOTE
l The stop and tail lamps use LEDs rather than
bulbs.
For repair and replacement, we recommend
you to contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
1- Headlamps, low beam: 55 W (H11)
2- Headlamps, high-beam: 60 W (HB3)
3- Front fog lamps*: 35 W (H8)
Daytime running lamps*: 13 W (P13W)
4- Front turn-signal lamps: 21 W (W21W)
5- Position lamps: 5 W (W5W)
6- Side turn-signal lamps: 5 W (WY5W)
*: if so equipped
Codes in parentheses indicate bulb types.
Inside
E08404900011
ABCD-
Headlamp (low beam)
Headlamp (high-beam)
Position lamp
Front turn-signal lamp
Refer to the following section for replacement.
Headlamps (low beam) ® p. 8-28
Headlamps (high-beam) ® p. 8-29
Position lamps ® p. 8-30
Front turn-signal lamps ® p. 8-30
Rear
1- Room lamp (rear): 8 W
2- Room lamp (front) & map lamps: 8 W
Use the following steps to remove the headlamp unit.
To remove
1. Open the bonnet. Refer to “Bonnet” on page
8-07.
2. Press the tab (A) to remove the connector (B).
8
8-24
OHAE12E5
Vehicle care and Maintenance
3. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screwdriver
with a cloth over its tip at the edge of the
work hole cover (D) on the deck garnish (E)
and pry gently to remove the cover.
NOTE
l When
removing the connector for the left
headlamp, do not forget to unhook the headlamp wiring from the wiring bracket (C).
5. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screwdriver
to remove the 2 clips holding down the bumper.
Underside of bumper
4. Loosen the fixing bolt (F) until the head of
the bolt touches the deck garnish (E).
6. Slowly lift up the bumper and disconnect the
joint between the bumper and fender.
8
NOTE
l Do not loosen the bolt more than necessary.
Doing so could cause the bolt to fall off.
OHAE12E5
8-25
Vehicle care and Maintenance
NOTE
l When disconnecting the joint, be careful not
to damage surrounding parts.
9. As shown in the illustration, shift the entire
headlamp unit upward and then unlatch the
tab (I) on the upper part of the headlamp to
remove it from the vehicle.
To install
The mounting brackets on the headlamps are engraved with the numbers
to
. Install each
branch in the order of the assigned numbers.
7. While keeping the bumper flipped up, remove the side fixing bolt (G).
1. As shown in the illustration, insert the cut
on to
out area (A) on mounting bracket
the bolt (B) remaining on the vehicle body,
and latch the tab (C) on the fixture hole (D)
to install the entire headlamp unit to the vehicle body.
8. Remove the front fixing bolt (H).
NOTE
l Do not force the headlamp off the vehicle as
doing so could damage the tab.
8
8-26
OHAE12E5
Vehicle care and Maintenance
NOTE
2. Make sure that the tip (F) of the mounting
bracket
is hooked on the body edge (G).
4. Firmly tighten the headlamp mounting bolts
in the following order:
to .
3. Make sure that the pin (H) is inside the hole
on the mounting bracket .
5. After pressing down on the bumper and fender joint from above to fit it in, fix it in place
with the clip.
l Use the work hole (E) on the deck garnish to
confirm that the tab (C) on the upper part of
the headlamp is firmly fixed in place.
Upper part of headlamp
NOTE
l Secure the bumper clip by first inserting it into the mounting hole and then pressing the
centre (I) of the clip in.
OHAE12E5
8-27
8
Vehicle care and Maintenance
Headlamps (low beam)
E08405100010
1. Turn the cap (A) anticlockwise to remove it.
6. Firmly insert the connector (J).
7. Firmly install the cover (L) on the deck garnish.
2. Turn the socket (B) anticlockwise to remove
it.
NOTE
l When inserting the connector for the left head-
lamp, do not forget to hook the headlamp wiring in the wiring bracket (K).
8
8-28
OHAE12E5
Vehicle care and Maintenance
3. While pulling up the tab (C), pull out the
bulb (D).
2. While holding down the tab (B), pull out the
bulb (C).
Headlamps (high-beam)
E08405200011
4. To install the bulb, perform the removal
steps in reverse.
1. Turn the socket (A) anticlockwise to remove
it.
3. To install the bulb, perform the removal
steps in reverse.
CAUTION
CAUTION
l Handle the halogen lamp bulb with care.
l Handle
l
l
The gas inside the halogen lamp bulb is
highly pressurized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching a halogen lamp bulb
can cause it to shatter.
Never hold the halogen lamp bulb with a
bare hand, dirty glove, etc.
The oil from your hand could cause the
bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated.
If the glass surface is dirty, it must be
cleaned with alcohol, paint thinner, etc.,
and refit it after drying it thoroughly.
OHAE12E5
halogen lamp bulbs with care.
The gas inside halogen lamp bulbs is highly pressurized, so dropping, knocking, or
scratching a halogen lamp bulb can cause
it to shatter.
Never hold the halogen lamp bulb with a
bare hand, dirty glove, etc.
The oil from your hand could cause the
bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated.
If the glass surface is dirty, it must be
cleaned with alcohol, paint thinner, etc.,
and refit it after drying it thoroughly.
8-29
8
Vehicle care and Maintenance
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
3. To install the bulb, perform the removal
steps in reverse.
3. To install the bulb, perform the removal
steps in reverse.
Position lamps
E08405300012
1. Turn the socket (A) anticlockwise to remove
it.
Front turn-signal lamps
Side turn-signal lamps
E08405400013
E08405500014
1. Turn the socket (A) anticlockwise to remove
it.
1. To remove a side turn-signal lamp, insert a
straight blade (or minus) screwdriver with a
cloth over its tip at the end of the lamp near
the rear of the body and use it to gently lever
the lamp out of the body.
*
8
*: Front of the vehicle
8-30
OHAE12E5
Vehicle care and Maintenance
2. Remove the socket and bulb assemblies by
turning it anticlockwise.
*: Front of the vehicle
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
Front fog lamps* / Daytime running
lamps*
E08405600015
1. To create enough work space, turn the steering wheel all the way in the same direction to
the side you wish to replace.
2. Remove the clips (A) by a screwdriver, then
lift the cover (B).
4. To install the bulb, perform the removal
steps in reverse.
C- Front fog lamp
D- Daytime running lamp
4. While holding down the tab (E), pull out the
bulb (F).
Front fog lamp
Daytime running lamp
5. To install the bulb, perform the removal
steps in reverse.
NOTE
l
When installing the lamp assembly, push in
the end facing the front of the vehicle first.
3. Turn the socket (C or D) anticlockwise to remove it.
OHAE12E5
8-31
8
Vehicle care and Maintenance
CAUTION
l Handle the halogen lamp bulb with care.
l
The gas inside a halogen lamp bulb is highly pressurized, so dropping, knocking, or
scratching a halogen lamp bulb can cause
it to shatter.
Never hold the halogen lamp bulb with a
bare hand, dirty glove, etc.
The oil from your hand could cause the
bulb to break the next time the fog lamps
are operated.
If the glass surface is dirty, it must be
cleaned with alcohol, paint thinner, etc.,
and refit it after drying it thoroughly.
Rear fog lamp
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
E08405700016
1. When removing the lamp unit (A), push it towards the left side of the vehicle body.
4. To install the bulb, perform the removal
steps in reverse.
2. Remove the socket (B) and bulb assembly by
turning it anticlockwise.
NOTE
l If the wiring harness is pulled off the harness
guides (C) on the lamp unit while replacing
the bulb, make sure to secure the wiring harness to the harness guides.
8
8-32
OHAE12E5
Vehicle care and Maintenance
l When installing the lamp unit, first insert the
tab (D) into the groove (E) on the body, and
then push on the lamp unit to fit it into place.
3. Move the lamp unit towards the rear of the vehicle and remove the pins (B) of the lamp
unit from the vehicle.
NOTE
l The stop and tail lamps use LEDs rather than
bulbs.
For repair and replacement, we recommend
you to contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.
5. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
4. Turn the socket anticlockwise to remove it.
Rear combination lamps
E08405800017
1. Open the tailgate. (Refer to “Tailgate” on
page 2-08.)
2. Remove the screws (A) that hold the lamp
unit and remove the lamp unit.
6. To install the bulb, perform the removal
steps in reverse.
C- Stop and tail lamp (LED) - cannot be replaced
D- Rear turn-signal lamp
E- Reversing lamp
OHAE12E5
8
8-33
Vehicle care and Maintenance
High-mounted stop lamp
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
Licence plate lamps
E08406000016
E08405900018
1. Remove the mounting screws (A) and remove the lamp unit.
1. When removing the lamp unit (A), push it towards the left side of the vehicle body.
4. To install the bulb, perform the removal
steps in reverse.
2. Turn the socket anticlockwise to remove it.
NOTE
l When installing the lamp unit, make sure not
to bend the washer fluid hose (B).
2. Use a straight blade (or minus) screwdriver
with a cloth over its tip to gently pry up the
tab (B) and remove the lens.
8
8-34
OHAE12E5
Vehicle care and Maintenance
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
4. To install the bulb, perform the removal
steps in reverse.
NOTE
l When installing the lamp, insert tab (C) first
then align and insert tab (D).
8
OHAE12E5
8-35
OHAE12E5
Specifications
Vehicle labeling............................................................................9-02
Vehicle dimensions.......................................................................9-03
Electric motor specifications........................................................9-04
Low voltage electrical system......................................................9-04
Tyres and wheels..........................................................................9-05
Electric energy consumption........................................................9-06
Refill capacities............................................................................9-07
9
OHAE12E5
Specifications
Vehicle labeling
E01100102899
The plate shows model code, engine model, transmission model and body colour code, etc. Please
use this number when ordering replacement parts.
Vehicle identification number
Electric motor number
The electric motor number is stamped on the flange
of the electric motor frame as shown in the illustrations.
The vehicle identification number is stamped in the
location shown in the illustration.
Vehicle information code plate
The vehicle information code plate is riveted as
shown in the illustration.
1234567-
Model code
Engine model code
Transmission model code
Body colour code
Interior code
Option code
Exterior code
9
9-02
OHAE12E5
*: Front of the vehicle
Specifications
Vehicle dimensions
E01100202669
1
Front track
1,310 mm
2
Overall width
1,475 mm
3
Front overhang
4
Wheel base
5
Rear overhang
425 mm
6
Overall length
3,475 mm
7
Ground clearance (unladen)
8
Overall height (unladen)
1,610 mm
9
Rear track
1,270 mm
Minimum turning radius
500 mm
2,550 mm
150 mm
Body
4.75 m
Wheel
4.5 m
OHAE12E5
9
9-03
Specifications
Electric motor specifications
Low voltage electrical system
E01100602458
Electric motor model
Y4F1
Maximum output
(ECE net)
49 kW/2,500 to
8,000 r/min
Maximum torque
180 Nm/0 to
2,000 r/min
Maximum 30 minutes
power
(ECE net)
E01100802232
Voltage
12 V
Auxiliary bat- Type (JIS)
tery
Capacity (5HR)
35 kW
9
9-04
OHAE12E5
34B19L (S)
27Ah
Specifications
Tyres and wheels
E01100902884
Item
Tyre
Wheel
Size
Front
Rear
145/65R15 72S
175/55R15 77S
15x4J
15x5J
Offset
35 mm
NOTE
l Contact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point for details on the combination used on your vehicle.
9
OHAE12E5
9-05
Specifications
Electric energy consumption
E01101800017
Item
Combined
135 Wh/km
Electric energy consumption [NEDC]*
150 km (93 miles)
Electric range (Cruising range) [NEDC]*
*:
NEDC stands for New European Driving Cycle. The values of electric energy consumption and electric range are based on ECE R101. These values vary
depending on driving style, road and traffic conditions, ambient temperature, use of air conditioners and so forth.
NOTE
l The results given do not express or imply any guarantee of the electric energy consumption of the particular vehicle.
l
l
l
l
The vehicle itself has not been tested and there are inevitably differences between individual vehicles of the same model. In addition, this vehicle may incorporate particular modifications. Furthermore, the driver’s style and road and traffic conditions, as well as the extent to which the vehicle has been driven and
the standard of maintenance, will all affect its electric energy consumption.
All mentioned values are referring to a new, driven in vehicle.
The consumption, but mainly the driving distance depends on the condition of the traction battery.
Parameters on traction battery are depending on temperature, climate, charging and charging history and age of the traction battery etc.
A bigger influence as known by combustion engine are the energy consumptive consumers of the vehicle like heating, air conditioning, etc.
9
9-06
OHAE12E5
Specifications
Refill capacities
E01101304049
Bonnet room
LHD
RHD
Electric motor unit room (under the floor of the luggage area)
9
OHAE12E5
9-07
Specifications
No.
*:
Item
1
Washer fluid
2
Brake fluid
3
Hot water heater fluid
4
Coolant
5
Transmission oil
6
Refrigerant (air conditioning)
Quantity
Lubricants
1.9 litres
—
As required
Brake fluid DOT 3 or DOT 4
LHD
1.9 litres [includes 0.4 litre in the reserve tank]
RHD
1.7 litres [includes 0.4 litre in the reserve tank]
DIA QUEEN SUPER LONG LIFE COOLANT PREMIUM
or equivalent*
5.1 litres [includes 1.1 litres in the
reserve tank]
0.75 litre
DIA QUEEN ATF SP III
305 - 345 g
HFC-134a
similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and non-borate coolant with long life hybrid organic acid technology
9
9-08
OHAE12E5
Alphabetical index
A
Accessory (Installation) 03
Accessory socket 6-36
Active stability control (ASC) 5-18
Additional equipment 8-20
Air conditioning
Important operation tips for the air conditioning 6-09
Air purifier 6-10
Airbag 3-20
Antenna 6-30
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) 5-15
Warning lamp 5-16
Assist grips 6-41
Audio
Error codes 6-26
Handling of compact discs 6-29
LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD
player 6-10
Auxiliary battery 8-12
Specification 9-04
Auxiliary battery charge warning lamp 4-10
B
Basic knowledge for charging 1-02
Battery
Auxiliary battery 8-12
Auxiliary battery charge warning lamp 4-10
Discharged battery (Emergency starting) 7-02
Disposal information for used batteries 05
Traction battery 02
Bonnet 8-07
Brake assist system 5-15
Brake
Anti-lock brake 5-15
Braking 5-14
Fluid 8-11,9-07
Parking brake 5-03
Warning lamp 4-09
Bulb capacity 8-23
C
Capacities 9-07
Card holder 6-36,6-39
Cargo loads 5-20
Central door locks 2-06
Charging indicator 4-09
Charging
Guideline for charging time 1-03
Quick charging 1-11
Regular charging 1-06
Child restraint 3-11
Child-protection rear doors 2-07
Cleaning
Exterior of your vehicle 8-03
Interior of your vehicle 8-02
Plastic, vinyl leather, etc. 8-02
Clock 6-31
Cold
Cautions and actions to deal with intense
cold 08
Combination headlamps and dipper switch 4-11
Coolant 8-09,9-07
Cruising range 03,9-06
Cruising range indicator 4-03,4-06
Cup holder 6-40
D
Daytime running lamps 4-13
Bulb capacity 8-24
Replacement 8-31
Demister (rear window) 4-18
Digital clock 6-31
OHAE12E5
Dimensions 9-03
Dipper (High/Low beam change) 4-13
Door ajar warning lamp 4-10
Doors
Central door locks 2-06
Child-protection 2-07
Lock and unlock 2-05
Driving the vehicle 5-11
Driving, alcohol and drugs 5-02
E
Economical driving 5-02
Electric motor switch 5-07
Electric motor unit
Warning lamp 4-11
Electric motor
Number 9-02
Specifications 9-04
Electric power steering system (EPS) 5-17
Electric window control 2-09
Driver’s switches 2-09
Lock switch 2-09
Passenger’s switches 2-09
Timer function 2-10
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system) 2-02
Emergency starting 7-02
Energy level gauge 4-06
Energy usage indicator 4-03
Error codes 6-26
EV charging cable 1-04
Exterior and interior lamp operation 8-19
F
Fluid capacities and lubricants 9-07
Fluid
Brake fluid 8-11,9-07
1
Alphabetical index
Coolant 8-09
Hot water heater fluid 8-09,9-07
Washer fluid 8-11,9-07
For cold and snowy weather 8-20
Front fog lamps
Bulb capacity 8-24
Indication lamp 4-09
Replacement 8-31
Switch 4-15
Front room lamp
Bulb capacity 8-24
Front seat 3-03
Front turn-signal lamps
Bulb capacity 8-24
Replacement 8-30
Fuel
Modification/alterations to the electrical systems 04
Fuses 8-20
Fusible links 8-20
G
Gauges 4-02,4-08
General maintenance 8-19
General vehicle data 9-03
Genuine parts 04
Glove box 6-39
H
Handling of compact discs 6-29
Hazard warning flasher switch 4-15
Hazard warning indication lamps 4-09
Head restraints 3-07
Headlamp levelling switch 4-13
Headlamps
Bulb capacity 8-24
Headlamp flasher 4-13
2
Replacement 8-24,8-28,8-29
Switch 4-11
Heat
Cautions and actions to deal with intense
heat 06
Heated mirror 5-07
Heated seat 3-04
High-beam indication lamp 4-09
High-mounted stop lamp
Bulb capacity 8-24
Replacement 8-34
Hinges and latches lubrication 8-19
Horn switch 4-19
Hot water heater fluid 8-09,9-07
I
i-MiEV 02
Cruising range 03
Main features 02
Traction battery 02
If the vehicle breaks down 7-02
Indication and warning lamps 4-08
Indication lamps 4-09
Inside rear-view mirror 5-05
Inspection and maintenance following rough road
operation 5-12
Instruments 4-02
Intense cold
Cautions and actions 08
Intense heat
Cautions and actions 06
Interior lamps 6-37
J
Jump starting (Emergency starting) 7-02
OHAE12E5
K
Keyless entry system 2-03
Keys 2-02
L
Labeling 9-02
Lamp monitor buzzer 4-12
Lamps (headlamps, fog lamp, etc.) auto-cutout function 4-12
Licence plate lamps
Bulb capacity 8-24
Replacement 8-34
Link System 6-33
Low voltage electrical system 9-04
Lubricants 9-07
LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD player 6-10
M
Map lamps 6-37,6-38
Bulb capacity 8-24
Meter illumination control 4-03,4-06
Mirror
Inside rear-view mirror 5-05
Outside rear-view mirrors 5-05
Modification/alterations to the electrical systems 04
O
Odometer 4-03,4-04
Oil
Transmission oil 9-07
Operation under adverse driving conditions 7-12
Outside rear-view mirrors 5-05
Alphabetical index
P
Parking 5-04
Parking brake 5-03
Position lamps
Bulb capacity 8-24
Indication lamp 4-09
Replacement 8-30
Power down warning lamp 4-11
Precautions to observe when using wipers and washers 4-18
Pregnant women restraint 3-10
Puncture
Tyre repair kit 7-04
Q
Quick charging 1-11
R
Radio
LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD
player 6-10
Ready indicator 4-09
Rear combination lamps
Bulb capacity 8-24
Replacement 8-33
Rear fog lamp
Bulb capacity 8-24
Indication lamp 4-09
Replacement 8-32
Switch 4-16
Rear room lamp
Bulb capacity 8-24
Rear seat 3-05
Rear turn-signal lamps
Bulb capacity 8-24
Replacement 8-30,8-33
Rear window demister switch 4-18
Rear-view mirror
Inside 5-05
Outside 5-05
Refill capacities 9-07
Regenerative braking 02
Regular charging 1-06
Replacement of lamp bulbs 8-23
Reversing lamps
Bulb capacity 8-24
Replacement 8-33
Roof carrier precaution 5-21
Room lamp (front) 6-37
Room lamp (rear) 6-38
S
Safe driving techniques 5-03
Seat belt 3-08
Child restraint 3-11
Force limiter 3-11
Inspection 3-20
Pregnant women restraint 3-10
Pretensioner 3-11
Seat belt reminder/warning lamp (for driver and
front passenger) 3-09
Warning lamp (for rear passenger) 3-10
Seats
Adjustment 3-03
Front seat 3-03
Head restraints 3-07
Heated seat 3-04
Rear seat 3-05
Secret box 6-39
Selector lever 5-09
Service precaution 8-06
Service reminder 4-03,4-04
Side turn-signal lamps
OHAE12E5
Bulb capacity 8-24
Replacement 8-30,8-33
Snow tyres 8-16
Specifications 9-02
Speedometer 4-02
Starting the electric motor unit 5-08
Steering wheel lock 5-08
Stop lamps
Bulb capacity 8-24
Replacement 8-33
Storage spaces 6-39
Glove box 6-39
Secret box 6-39
Sun visors 6-35
Supplemental restraint system 3-20
Servicing 3-30
Warning lamp 3-29
T
Tail lamps
Bulb capacity 8-24
Replacement 8-33
Tailgate 2-08
Towing 7-10
Traction battery 02
Transmission 5-09
Driving the vehicle 5-11
Selector lever 5-09
Selector lever position indicator 5-10
Tripmeter 4-03,4-04
Turn-signal indication lamps 4-09
Turn-signal lever 4-14
Tyre repair kit 7-04
Tyres 8-14
Inflation pressures 8-15
Size (tyre and wheel) 9-05
Snow tyres 8-16
Tread wear indicators 8-16
3
Alphabetical index
Tyre chains 8-17
Tyre repair kit 7-04
Tyre rotation 8-16
U
USB input terminal 6-33
How to connect an iPod 6-34
USB input terminal device
How to connect a USB memory device 6-33
V
Vanity mirror 6-35
Vehicle care precautions 8-02
Vehicle dimensions 9-03
Vehicle identification number 9-02
Vehicle information code plate 9-02
Vehicle labeling 9-02
Ventilators 6-02
W
Warning lamps 4-09
Washer
Fluid 8-11,9-07
Switch 4-16,4-17
Washing 8-03
Waxing 8-04
Weatherstripping 8-20
Wheel
Specification 9-05
Wiper
Rear window 4-17
Windscreen 4-16
Wiper blades 8-17
4
OHAE12E5
OHAE12E5
5
6
OHAE12E5
OHAE12E5
7
8
OHAE12E5
OHAE12E5
9
10
OHAE12E5
OHAE12E5
11
OHAE12E5
OHAE12E5
OHAE12E5